1 | libpng-manual.txt - A description on how to use and modify libpng
|
---|
2 |
|
---|
3 | Copyright (c) 2018 Cosmin Truta
|
---|
4 | Copyright (c) 1998-2018 Glenn Randers-Pehrson
|
---|
5 |
|
---|
6 | This document is released under the libpng license.
|
---|
7 | For conditions of distribution and use, see the disclaimer
|
---|
8 | and license in png.h
|
---|
9 |
|
---|
10 | Based on:
|
---|
11 |
|
---|
12 | libpng version 1.6.36 - December 1, 2018
|
---|
13 | Updated and distributed by Cosmin Truta
|
---|
14 | Copyright (c) 2018 Cosmin Truta
|
---|
15 |
|
---|
16 | libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.6.35 - July 15, 2018
|
---|
17 | Updated and distributed by Glenn Randers-Pehrson
|
---|
18 | Copyright (c) 1998-2018 Glenn Randers-Pehrson
|
---|
19 |
|
---|
20 | libpng 1.0 beta 6 - version 0.96 - May 28, 1997
|
---|
21 | Updated and distributed by Andreas Dilger
|
---|
22 | Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
|
---|
23 |
|
---|
24 | libpng 1.0 beta 2 - version 0.88 - January 26, 1996
|
---|
25 | For conditions of distribution and use, see copyright
|
---|
26 | notice in png.h. Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric
|
---|
27 | Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
|
---|
28 |
|
---|
29 | Updated/rewritten per request in the libpng FAQ
|
---|
30 | Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Frank J. T. Wojcik
|
---|
31 | December 18, 1995 & January 20, 1996
|
---|
32 |
|
---|
33 | TABLE OF CONTENTS
|
---|
34 |
|
---|
35 | I. Introduction
|
---|
36 | II. Structures
|
---|
37 | III. Reading
|
---|
38 | IV. Writing
|
---|
39 | V. Simplified API
|
---|
40 | VI. Modifying/Customizing libpng
|
---|
41 | VII. MNG support
|
---|
42 | VIII. Changes to Libpng from version 0.88
|
---|
43 | IX. Changes to Libpng from version 1.0.x to 1.2.x
|
---|
44 | X. Changes to Libpng from version 1.0.x/1.2.x to 1.4.x
|
---|
45 | XI. Changes to Libpng from version 1.4.x to 1.5.x
|
---|
46 | XII. Changes to Libpng from version 1.5.x to 1.6.x
|
---|
47 | XIII. Detecting libpng
|
---|
48 | XIV. Source code repository
|
---|
49 | XV. Coding style
|
---|
50 |
|
---|
51 | I. Introduction
|
---|
52 |
|
---|
53 | This file describes how to use and modify the PNG reference library
|
---|
54 | (known as libpng) for your own use. In addition to this
|
---|
55 | file, example.c is a good starting point for using the library, as
|
---|
56 | it is heavily commented and should include everything most people
|
---|
57 | will need. We assume that libpng is already installed; see the
|
---|
58 | INSTALL file for instructions on how to configure and install libpng.
|
---|
59 |
|
---|
60 | For examples of libpng usage, see the files "example.c", "pngtest.c",
|
---|
61 | and the files in the "contrib" directory, all of which are included in
|
---|
62 | the libpng distribution.
|
---|
63 |
|
---|
64 | Libpng was written as a companion to the PNG specification, as a way
|
---|
65 | of reducing the amount of time and effort it takes to support the PNG
|
---|
66 | file format in application programs.
|
---|
67 |
|
---|
68 | The PNG specification (second edition), November 2003, is available as
|
---|
69 | a W3C Recommendation and as an ISO Standard (ISO/IEC 15948:2004 (E)) at
|
---|
70 | <https://www.w3.org/TR/2003/REC-PNG-20031110/>.
|
---|
71 | The W3C and ISO documents have identical technical content.
|
---|
72 |
|
---|
73 | The PNG-1.2 specification is available at
|
---|
74 | <https://png-mng.sourceforge.io/pub/png/spec/1.2/>.
|
---|
75 | It is technically equivalent
|
---|
76 | to the PNG specification (second edition) but has some additional material.
|
---|
77 |
|
---|
78 | The PNG-1.0 specification is available as RFC 2083 at
|
---|
79 | <https://png-mng.sourceforge.io/pub/png/spec/1.0/> and as a
|
---|
80 | W3C Recommendation at <https://www.w3.org/TR/REC-png-961001>.
|
---|
81 |
|
---|
82 | Some additional chunks are described in the special-purpose public chunks
|
---|
83 | documents at <http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/spec/register/>
|
---|
84 |
|
---|
85 | Other information
|
---|
86 | about PNG, and the latest version of libpng, can be found at the PNG home
|
---|
87 | page, <http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/>.
|
---|
88 |
|
---|
89 | Most users will not have to modify the library significantly; advanced
|
---|
90 | users may want to modify it more. All attempts were made to make it as
|
---|
91 | complete as possible, while keeping the code easy to understand.
|
---|
92 | Currently, this library only supports C. Support for other languages
|
---|
93 | is being considered.
|
---|
94 |
|
---|
95 | Libpng has been designed to handle multiple sessions at one time,
|
---|
96 | to be easily modifiable, to be portable to the vast majority of
|
---|
97 | machines (ANSI, K&R, 16-, 32-, and 64-bit) available, and to be easy
|
---|
98 | to use. The ultimate goal of libpng is to promote the acceptance of
|
---|
99 | the PNG file format in whatever way possible. While there is still
|
---|
100 | work to be done (see the TODO file), libpng should cover the
|
---|
101 | majority of the needs of its users.
|
---|
102 |
|
---|
103 | Libpng uses zlib for its compression and decompression of PNG files.
|
---|
104 | Further information about zlib, and the latest version of zlib, can
|
---|
105 | be found at the zlib home page, <https://zlib.net/>.
|
---|
106 | The zlib compression utility is a general purpose utility that is
|
---|
107 | useful for more than PNG files, and can be used without libpng.
|
---|
108 | See the documentation delivered with zlib for more details.
|
---|
109 | You can usually find the source files for the zlib utility wherever you
|
---|
110 | find the libpng source files.
|
---|
111 |
|
---|
112 | Libpng is thread safe, provided the threads are using different
|
---|
113 | instances of the structures. Each thread should have its own
|
---|
114 | png_struct and png_info instances, and thus its own image.
|
---|
115 | Libpng does not protect itself against two threads using the
|
---|
116 | same instance of a structure.
|
---|
117 |
|
---|
118 | II. Structures
|
---|
119 |
|
---|
120 | There are two main structures that are important to libpng, png_struct
|
---|
121 | and png_info. Both are internal structures that are no longer exposed
|
---|
122 | in the libpng interface (as of libpng 1.5.0).
|
---|
123 |
|
---|
124 | The png_info structure is designed to provide information about the
|
---|
125 | PNG file. At one time, the fields of png_info were intended to be
|
---|
126 | directly accessible to the user. However, this tended to cause problems
|
---|
127 | with applications using dynamically loaded libraries, and as a result
|
---|
128 | a set of interface functions for png_info (the png_get_*() and png_set_*()
|
---|
129 | functions) was developed, and direct access to the png_info fields was
|
---|
130 | deprecated..
|
---|
131 |
|
---|
132 | The png_struct structure is the object used by the library to decode a
|
---|
133 | single image. As of 1.5.0 this structure is also not exposed.
|
---|
134 |
|
---|
135 | Almost all libpng APIs require a pointer to a png_struct as the first argument.
|
---|
136 | Many (in particular the png_set and png_get APIs) also require a pointer
|
---|
137 | to png_info as the second argument. Some application visible macros
|
---|
138 | defined in png.h designed for basic data access (reading and writing
|
---|
139 | integers in the PNG format) don't take a png_info pointer, but it's almost
|
---|
140 | always safe to assume that a (png_struct*) has to be passed to call an API
|
---|
141 | function.
|
---|
142 |
|
---|
143 | You can have more than one png_info structure associated with an image,
|
---|
144 | as illustrated in pngtest.c, one for information valid prior to the
|
---|
145 | IDAT chunks and another (called "end_info" below) for things after them.
|
---|
146 |
|
---|
147 | The png.h header file is an invaluable reference for programming with libpng.
|
---|
148 | And while I'm on the topic, make sure you include the libpng header file:
|
---|
149 |
|
---|
150 | #include <png.h>
|
---|
151 |
|
---|
152 | and also (as of libpng-1.5.0) the zlib header file, if you need it:
|
---|
153 |
|
---|
154 | #include <zlib.h>
|
---|
155 |
|
---|
156 | Types
|
---|
157 |
|
---|
158 | The png.h header file defines a number of integral types used by the
|
---|
159 | APIs. Most of these are fairly obvious; for example types corresponding
|
---|
160 | to integers of particular sizes and types for passing color values.
|
---|
161 |
|
---|
162 | One exception is how non-integral numbers are handled. For application
|
---|
163 | convenience most APIs that take such numbers have C (double) arguments;
|
---|
164 | however, internally PNG, and libpng, use 32 bit signed integers and encode
|
---|
165 | the value by multiplying by 100,000. As of libpng 1.5.0 a convenience
|
---|
166 | macro PNG_FP_1 is defined in png.h along with a type (png_fixed_point)
|
---|
167 | which is simply (png_int_32).
|
---|
168 |
|
---|
169 | All APIs that take (double) arguments also have a matching API that
|
---|
170 | takes the corresponding fixed point integer arguments. The fixed point
|
---|
171 | API has the same name as the floating point one with "_fixed" appended.
|
---|
172 | The actual range of values permitted in the APIs is frequently less than
|
---|
173 | the full range of (png_fixed_point) (-21474 to +21474). When APIs require
|
---|
174 | a non-negative argument the type is recorded as png_uint_32 above. Consult
|
---|
175 | the header file and the text below for more information.
|
---|
176 |
|
---|
177 | Special care must be take with sCAL chunk handling because the chunk itself
|
---|
178 | uses non-integral values encoded as strings containing decimal floating point
|
---|
179 | numbers. See the comments in the header file.
|
---|
180 |
|
---|
181 | Configuration
|
---|
182 |
|
---|
183 | The main header file function declarations are frequently protected by C
|
---|
184 | preprocessing directives of the form:
|
---|
185 |
|
---|
186 | #ifdef PNG_feature_SUPPORTED
|
---|
187 | declare-function
|
---|
188 | #endif
|
---|
189 | ...
|
---|
190 | #ifdef PNG_feature_SUPPORTED
|
---|
191 | use-function
|
---|
192 | #endif
|
---|
193 |
|
---|
194 | The library can be built without support for these APIs, although a
|
---|
195 | standard build will have all implemented APIs. Application programs
|
---|
196 | should check the feature macros before using an API for maximum
|
---|
197 | portability. From libpng 1.5.0 the feature macros set during the build
|
---|
198 | of libpng are recorded in the header file "pnglibconf.h" and this file
|
---|
199 | is always included by png.h.
|
---|
200 |
|
---|
201 | If you don't need to change the library configuration from the default, skip to
|
---|
202 | the next section ("Reading").
|
---|
203 |
|
---|
204 | Notice that some of the makefiles in the 'scripts' directory and (in 1.5.0) all
|
---|
205 | of the build project files in the 'projects' directory simply copy
|
---|
206 | scripts/pnglibconf.h.prebuilt to pnglibconf.h. This means that these build
|
---|
207 | systems do not permit easy auto-configuration of the library - they only
|
---|
208 | support the default configuration.
|
---|
209 |
|
---|
210 | The easiest way to make minor changes to the libpng configuration when
|
---|
211 | auto-configuration is supported is to add definitions to the command line
|
---|
212 | using (typically) CPPFLAGS. For example:
|
---|
213 |
|
---|
214 | CPPFLAGS=-DPNG_NO_FLOATING_ARITHMETIC
|
---|
215 |
|
---|
216 | will change the internal libpng math implementation for gamma correction and
|
---|
217 | other arithmetic calculations to fixed point, avoiding the need for fast
|
---|
218 | floating point support. The result can be seen in the generated pnglibconf.h -
|
---|
219 | make sure it contains the changed feature macro setting.
|
---|
220 |
|
---|
221 | If you need to make more extensive configuration changes - more than one or two
|
---|
222 | feature macro settings - you can either add -DPNG_USER_CONFIG to the build
|
---|
223 | command line and put a list of feature macro settings in pngusr.h or you can set
|
---|
224 | DFA_XTRA (a makefile variable) to a file containing the same information in the
|
---|
225 | form of 'option' settings.
|
---|
226 |
|
---|
227 | A. Changing pnglibconf.h
|
---|
228 |
|
---|
229 | A variety of methods exist to build libpng. Not all of these support
|
---|
230 | reconfiguration of pnglibconf.h. To reconfigure pnglibconf.h it must either be
|
---|
231 | rebuilt from scripts/pnglibconf.dfa using awk or it must be edited by hand.
|
---|
232 |
|
---|
233 | Hand editing is achieved by copying scripts/pnglibconf.h.prebuilt to
|
---|
234 | pnglibconf.h and changing the lines defining the supported features, paying
|
---|
235 | very close attention to the 'option' information in scripts/pnglibconf.dfa
|
---|
236 | that describes those features and their requirements. This is easy to get
|
---|
237 | wrong.
|
---|
238 |
|
---|
239 | B. Configuration using DFA_XTRA
|
---|
240 |
|
---|
241 | Rebuilding from pnglibconf.dfa is easy if a functioning 'awk', or a later
|
---|
242 | variant such as 'nawk' or 'gawk', is available. The configure build will
|
---|
243 | automatically find an appropriate awk and build pnglibconf.h.
|
---|
244 | The scripts/pnglibconf.mak file contains a set of make rules for doing the
|
---|
245 | same thing if configure is not used, and many of the makefiles in the scripts
|
---|
246 | directory use this approach.
|
---|
247 |
|
---|
248 | When rebuilding simply write a new file containing changed options and set
|
---|
249 | DFA_XTRA to the name of this file. This causes the build to append the new file
|
---|
250 | to the end of scripts/pnglibconf.dfa. The pngusr.dfa file should contain lines
|
---|
251 | of the following forms:
|
---|
252 |
|
---|
253 | everything = off
|
---|
254 |
|
---|
255 | This turns all optional features off. Include it at the start of pngusr.dfa to
|
---|
256 | make it easier to build a minimal configuration. You will need to turn at least
|
---|
257 | some features on afterward to enable either reading or writing code, or both.
|
---|
258 |
|
---|
259 | option feature on
|
---|
260 | option feature off
|
---|
261 |
|
---|
262 | Enable or disable a single feature. This will automatically enable other
|
---|
263 | features required by a feature that is turned on or disable other features that
|
---|
264 | require a feature which is turned off. Conflicting settings will cause an error
|
---|
265 | message to be emitted by awk.
|
---|
266 |
|
---|
267 | setting feature default value
|
---|
268 |
|
---|
269 | Changes the default value of setting 'feature' to 'value'. There are a small
|
---|
270 | number of settings listed at the top of pnglibconf.h, they are documented in the
|
---|
271 | source code. Most of these values have performance implications for the library
|
---|
272 | but most of them have no visible effect on the API. Some can also be overridden
|
---|
273 | from the API.
|
---|
274 |
|
---|
275 | This method of building a customized pnglibconf.h is illustrated in
|
---|
276 | contrib/pngminim/*. See the "$(PNGCONF):" target in the makefile and
|
---|
277 | pngusr.dfa in these directories.
|
---|
278 |
|
---|
279 | C. Configuration using PNG_USER_CONFIG
|
---|
280 |
|
---|
281 | If -DPNG_USER_CONFIG is added to the CPPFLAGS when pnglibconf.h is built,
|
---|
282 | the file pngusr.h will automatically be included before the options in
|
---|
283 | scripts/pnglibconf.dfa are processed. Your pngusr.h file should contain only
|
---|
284 | macro definitions turning features on or off or setting settings.
|
---|
285 |
|
---|
286 | Apart from the global setting "everything = off" all the options listed above
|
---|
287 | can be set using macros in pngusr.h:
|
---|
288 |
|
---|
289 | #define PNG_feature_SUPPORTED
|
---|
290 |
|
---|
291 | is equivalent to:
|
---|
292 |
|
---|
293 | option feature on
|
---|
294 |
|
---|
295 | #define PNG_NO_feature
|
---|
296 |
|
---|
297 | is equivalent to:
|
---|
298 |
|
---|
299 | option feature off
|
---|
300 |
|
---|
301 | #define PNG_feature value
|
---|
302 |
|
---|
303 | is equivalent to:
|
---|
304 |
|
---|
305 | setting feature default value
|
---|
306 |
|
---|
307 | Notice that in both cases, pngusr.dfa and pngusr.h, the contents of the
|
---|
308 | pngusr file you supply override the contents of scripts/pnglibconf.dfa
|
---|
309 |
|
---|
310 | If confusing or incomprehensible behavior results it is possible to
|
---|
311 | examine the intermediate file pnglibconf.dfn to find the full set of
|
---|
312 | dependency information for each setting and option. Simply locate the
|
---|
313 | feature in the file and read the C comments that precede it.
|
---|
314 |
|
---|
315 | This method is also illustrated in the contrib/pngminim/* makefiles and
|
---|
316 | pngusr.h.
|
---|
317 |
|
---|
318 | III. Reading
|
---|
319 |
|
---|
320 | We'll now walk you through the possible functions to call when reading
|
---|
321 | in a PNG file sequentially, briefly explaining the syntax and purpose
|
---|
322 | of each one. See example.c and png.h for more detail. While
|
---|
323 | progressive reading is covered in the next section, you will still
|
---|
324 | need some of the functions discussed in this section to read a PNG
|
---|
325 | file.
|
---|
326 |
|
---|
327 | Setup
|
---|
328 |
|
---|
329 | You will want to do the I/O initialization(*) before you get into libpng,
|
---|
330 | so if it doesn't work, you don't have much to undo. Of course, you
|
---|
331 | will also want to insure that you are, in fact, dealing with a PNG
|
---|
332 | file. Libpng provides a simple check to see if a file is a PNG file.
|
---|
333 | To use it, pass in the first 1 to 8 bytes of the file to the function
|
---|
334 | png_sig_cmp(), and it will return 0 (false) if the bytes match the
|
---|
335 | corresponding bytes of the PNG signature, or nonzero (true) otherwise.
|
---|
336 | Of course, the more bytes you pass in, the greater the accuracy of the
|
---|
337 | prediction.
|
---|
338 |
|
---|
339 | If you are intending to keep the file pointer open for use in libpng,
|
---|
340 | you must ensure you don't read more than 8 bytes from the beginning
|
---|
341 | of the file, and you also have to make a call to png_set_sig_bytes()
|
---|
342 | with the number of bytes you read from the beginning. Libpng will
|
---|
343 | then only check the bytes (if any) that your program didn't read.
|
---|
344 |
|
---|
345 | (*): If you are not using the standard I/O functions, you will need
|
---|
346 | to replace them with custom functions. See the discussion under
|
---|
347 | Customizing libpng.
|
---|
348 |
|
---|
349 | FILE *fp = fopen(file_name, "rb");
|
---|
350 | if (!fp)
|
---|
351 | {
|
---|
352 | return ERROR;
|
---|
353 | }
|
---|
354 |
|
---|
355 | if (fread(header, 1, number, fp) != number)
|
---|
356 | {
|
---|
357 | return ERROR;
|
---|
358 | }
|
---|
359 |
|
---|
360 | is_png = !png_sig_cmp(header, 0, number);
|
---|
361 | if (!is_png)
|
---|
362 | {
|
---|
363 | return NOT_PNG;
|
---|
364 | }
|
---|
365 |
|
---|
366 | Next, png_struct and png_info need to be allocated and initialized. In
|
---|
367 | order to ensure that the size of these structures is correct even with a
|
---|
368 | dynamically linked libpng, there are functions to initialize and
|
---|
369 | allocate the structures. We also pass the library version, optional
|
---|
370 | pointers to error handling functions, and a pointer to a data struct for
|
---|
371 | use by the error functions, if necessary (the pointer and functions can
|
---|
372 | be NULL if the default error handlers are to be used). See the section
|
---|
373 | on Changes to Libpng below regarding the old initialization functions.
|
---|
374 | The structure allocation functions quietly return NULL if they fail to
|
---|
375 | create the structure, so your application should check for that.
|
---|
376 |
|
---|
377 | png_structp png_ptr = png_create_read_struct
|
---|
378 | (PNG_LIBPNG_VER_STRING, (png_voidp)user_error_ptr,
|
---|
379 | user_error_fn, user_warning_fn);
|
---|
380 |
|
---|
381 | if (!png_ptr)
|
---|
382 | return ERROR;
|
---|
383 |
|
---|
384 | png_infop info_ptr = png_create_info_struct(png_ptr);
|
---|
385 |
|
---|
386 | if (!info_ptr)
|
---|
387 | {
|
---|
388 | png_destroy_read_struct(&png_ptr,
|
---|
389 | (png_infopp)NULL, (png_infopp)NULL);
|
---|
390 | return ERROR;
|
---|
391 | }
|
---|
392 |
|
---|
393 | If you want to use your own memory allocation routines,
|
---|
394 | use a libpng that was built with PNG_USER_MEM_SUPPORTED defined, and use
|
---|
395 | png_create_read_struct_2() instead of png_create_read_struct():
|
---|
396 |
|
---|
397 | png_structp png_ptr = png_create_read_struct_2
|
---|
398 | (PNG_LIBPNG_VER_STRING, (png_voidp)user_error_ptr,
|
---|
399 | user_error_fn, user_warning_fn, (png_voidp)
|
---|
400 | user_mem_ptr, user_malloc_fn, user_free_fn);
|
---|
401 |
|
---|
402 | The error handling routines passed to png_create_read_struct()
|
---|
403 | and the memory alloc/free routines passed to png_create_struct_2()
|
---|
404 | are only necessary if you are not using the libpng supplied error
|
---|
405 | handling and memory alloc/free functions.
|
---|
406 |
|
---|
407 | When libpng encounters an error, it expects to longjmp back
|
---|
408 | to your routine. Therefore, you will need to call setjmp and pass
|
---|
409 | your png_jmpbuf(png_ptr). If you read the file from different
|
---|
410 | routines, you will need to update the longjmp buffer every time you enter
|
---|
411 | a new routine that will call a png_*() function.
|
---|
412 |
|
---|
413 | See your documentation of setjmp/longjmp for your compiler for more
|
---|
414 | information on setjmp/longjmp. See the discussion on libpng error
|
---|
415 | handling in the Customizing Libpng section below for more information
|
---|
416 | on the libpng error handling. If an error occurs, and libpng longjmp's
|
---|
417 | back to your setjmp, you will want to call png_destroy_read_struct() to
|
---|
418 | free any memory.
|
---|
419 |
|
---|
420 | if (setjmp(png_jmpbuf(png_ptr)))
|
---|
421 | {
|
---|
422 | png_destroy_read_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr,
|
---|
423 | &end_info);
|
---|
424 | fclose(fp);
|
---|
425 | return ERROR;
|
---|
426 | }
|
---|
427 |
|
---|
428 | Pass (png_infopp)NULL instead of &end_info if you didn't create
|
---|
429 | an end_info structure.
|
---|
430 |
|
---|
431 | If you would rather avoid the complexity of setjmp/longjmp issues,
|
---|
432 | you can compile libpng with PNG_NO_SETJMP, in which case
|
---|
433 | errors will result in a call to PNG_ABORT() which defaults to abort().
|
---|
434 |
|
---|
435 | You can #define PNG_ABORT() to a function that does something
|
---|
436 | more useful than abort(), as long as your function does not
|
---|
437 | return.
|
---|
438 |
|
---|
439 | Now you need to set up the input code. The default for libpng is to
|
---|
440 | use the C function fread(). If you use this, you will need to pass a
|
---|
441 | valid FILE * in the function png_init_io(). Be sure that the file is
|
---|
442 | opened in binary mode. If you wish to handle reading data in another
|
---|
443 | way, you need not call the png_init_io() function, but you must then
|
---|
444 | implement the libpng I/O methods discussed in the Customizing Libpng
|
---|
445 | section below.
|
---|
446 |
|
---|
447 | png_init_io(png_ptr, fp);
|
---|
448 |
|
---|
449 | If you had previously opened the file and read any of the signature from
|
---|
450 | the beginning in order to see if this was a PNG file, you need to let
|
---|
451 | libpng know that there are some bytes missing from the start of the file.
|
---|
452 |
|
---|
453 | png_set_sig_bytes(png_ptr, number);
|
---|
454 |
|
---|
455 | You can change the zlib compression buffer size to be used while
|
---|
456 | reading compressed data with
|
---|
457 |
|
---|
458 | png_set_compression_buffer_size(png_ptr, buffer_size);
|
---|
459 |
|
---|
460 | where the default size is 8192 bytes. Note that the buffer size
|
---|
461 | is changed immediately and the buffer is reallocated immediately,
|
---|
462 | instead of setting a flag to be acted upon later.
|
---|
463 |
|
---|
464 | If you want CRC errors to be handled in a different manner than
|
---|
465 | the default, use
|
---|
466 |
|
---|
467 | png_set_crc_action(png_ptr, crit_action, ancil_action);
|
---|
468 |
|
---|
469 | The values for png_set_crc_action() say how libpng is to handle CRC errors in
|
---|
470 | ancillary and critical chunks, and whether to use the data contained
|
---|
471 | therein. Starting with libpng-1.6.26, this also governs how an ADLER32 error
|
---|
472 | is handled while reading the IDAT chunk. Note that it is impossible to
|
---|
473 | "discard" data in a critical chunk.
|
---|
474 |
|
---|
475 | Choices for (int) crit_action are
|
---|
476 | PNG_CRC_DEFAULT 0 error/quit
|
---|
477 | PNG_CRC_ERROR_QUIT 1 error/quit
|
---|
478 | PNG_CRC_WARN_USE 3 warn/use data
|
---|
479 | PNG_CRC_QUIET_USE 4 quiet/use data
|
---|
480 | PNG_CRC_NO_CHANGE 5 use the current value
|
---|
481 |
|
---|
482 | Choices for (int) ancil_action are
|
---|
483 | PNG_CRC_DEFAULT 0 error/quit
|
---|
484 | PNG_CRC_ERROR_QUIT 1 error/quit
|
---|
485 | PNG_CRC_WARN_DISCARD 2 warn/discard data
|
---|
486 | PNG_CRC_WARN_USE 3 warn/use data
|
---|
487 | PNG_CRC_QUIET_USE 4 quiet/use data
|
---|
488 | PNG_CRC_NO_CHANGE 5 use the current value
|
---|
489 |
|
---|
490 | When the setting for crit_action is PNG_CRC_QUIET_USE, the CRC and ADLER32
|
---|
491 | checksums are not only ignored, but they are not evaluated.
|
---|
492 |
|
---|
493 | Setting up callback code
|
---|
494 |
|
---|
495 | You can set up a callback function to handle any unknown chunks in the
|
---|
496 | input stream. You must supply the function
|
---|
497 |
|
---|
498 | read_chunk_callback(png_structp png_ptr,
|
---|
499 | png_unknown_chunkp chunk);
|
---|
500 | {
|
---|
501 | /* The unknown chunk structure contains your
|
---|
502 | chunk data, along with similar data for any other
|
---|
503 | unknown chunks: */
|
---|
504 |
|
---|
505 | png_byte name[5];
|
---|
506 | png_byte *data;
|
---|
507 | size_t size;
|
---|
508 |
|
---|
509 | /* Note that libpng has already taken care of
|
---|
510 | the CRC handling */
|
---|
511 |
|
---|
512 | /* put your code here. Search for your chunk in the
|
---|
513 | unknown chunk structure, process it, and return one
|
---|
514 | of the following: */
|
---|
515 |
|
---|
516 | return -n; /* chunk had an error */
|
---|
517 | return 0; /* did not recognize */
|
---|
518 | return n; /* success */
|
---|
519 | }
|
---|
520 |
|
---|
521 | (You can give your function another name that you like instead of
|
---|
522 | "read_chunk_callback")
|
---|
523 |
|
---|
524 | To inform libpng about your function, use
|
---|
525 |
|
---|
526 | png_set_read_user_chunk_fn(png_ptr, user_chunk_ptr,
|
---|
527 | read_chunk_callback);
|
---|
528 |
|
---|
529 | This names not only the callback function, but also a user pointer that
|
---|
530 | you can retrieve with
|
---|
531 |
|
---|
532 | png_get_user_chunk_ptr(png_ptr);
|
---|
533 |
|
---|
534 | If you call the png_set_read_user_chunk_fn() function, then all unknown
|
---|
535 | chunks which the callback does not handle will be saved when read. You can
|
---|
536 | cause them to be discarded by returning '1' ("handled") instead of '0'. This
|
---|
537 | behavior will change in libpng 1.7 and the default handling set by the
|
---|
538 | png_set_keep_unknown_chunks() function, described below, will be used when the
|
---|
539 | callback returns 0. If you want the existing behavior you should set the global
|
---|
540 | default to PNG_HANDLE_CHUNK_IF_SAFE now; this is compatible with all current
|
---|
541 | versions of libpng and with 1.7. Libpng 1.6 issues a warning if you keep the
|
---|
542 | default, or PNG_HANDLE_CHUNK_NEVER, and the callback returns 0.
|
---|
543 |
|
---|
544 | At this point, you can set up a callback function that will be
|
---|
545 | called after each row has been read, which you can use to control
|
---|
546 | a progress meter or the like. It's demonstrated in pngtest.c.
|
---|
547 | You must supply a function
|
---|
548 |
|
---|
549 | void read_row_callback(png_structp png_ptr,
|
---|
550 | png_uint_32 row, int pass);
|
---|
551 | {
|
---|
552 | /* put your code here */
|
---|
553 | }
|
---|
554 |
|
---|
555 | (You can give it another name that you like instead of "read_row_callback")
|
---|
556 |
|
---|
557 | To inform libpng about your function, use
|
---|
558 |
|
---|
559 | png_set_read_status_fn(png_ptr, read_row_callback);
|
---|
560 |
|
---|
561 | When this function is called the row has already been completely processed and
|
---|
562 | the 'row' and 'pass' refer to the next row to be handled. For the
|
---|
563 | non-interlaced case the row that was just handled is simply one less than the
|
---|
564 | passed in row number, and pass will always be 0. For the interlaced case the
|
---|
565 | same applies unless the row value is 0, in which case the row just handled was
|
---|
566 | the last one from one of the preceding passes. Because interlacing may skip a
|
---|
567 | pass you cannot be sure that the preceding pass is just 'pass-1'; if you really
|
---|
568 | need to know what the last pass is record (row,pass) from the callback and use
|
---|
569 | the last recorded value each time.
|
---|
570 |
|
---|
571 | As with the user transform you can find the output row using the
|
---|
572 | PNG_ROW_FROM_PASS_ROW macro.
|
---|
573 |
|
---|
574 | Unknown-chunk handling
|
---|
575 |
|
---|
576 | Now you get to set the way the library processes unknown chunks in the
|
---|
577 | input PNG stream. Both known and unknown chunks will be read. Normal
|
---|
578 | behavior is that known chunks will be parsed into information in
|
---|
579 | various info_ptr members while unknown chunks will be discarded. This
|
---|
580 | behavior can be wasteful if your application will never use some known
|
---|
581 | chunk types. To change this, you can call:
|
---|
582 |
|
---|
583 | png_set_keep_unknown_chunks(png_ptr, keep,
|
---|
584 | chunk_list, num_chunks);
|
---|
585 |
|
---|
586 | keep - 0: default unknown chunk handling
|
---|
587 | 1: ignore; do not keep
|
---|
588 | 2: keep only if safe-to-copy
|
---|
589 | 3: keep even if unsafe-to-copy
|
---|
590 |
|
---|
591 | You can use these definitions:
|
---|
592 | PNG_HANDLE_CHUNK_AS_DEFAULT 0
|
---|
593 | PNG_HANDLE_CHUNK_NEVER 1
|
---|
594 | PNG_HANDLE_CHUNK_IF_SAFE 2
|
---|
595 | PNG_HANDLE_CHUNK_ALWAYS 3
|
---|
596 |
|
---|
597 | chunk_list - list of chunks affected (a byte string,
|
---|
598 | five bytes per chunk, NULL or '\0' if
|
---|
599 | num_chunks is positive; ignored if
|
---|
600 | numchunks <= 0).
|
---|
601 |
|
---|
602 | num_chunks - number of chunks affected; if 0, all
|
---|
603 | unknown chunks are affected. If positive,
|
---|
604 | only the chunks in the list are affected,
|
---|
605 | and if negative all unknown chunks and
|
---|
606 | all known chunks except for the IHDR,
|
---|
607 | PLTE, tRNS, IDAT, and IEND chunks are
|
---|
608 | affected.
|
---|
609 |
|
---|
610 | Unknown chunks declared in this way will be saved as raw data onto a
|
---|
611 | list of png_unknown_chunk structures. If a chunk that is normally
|
---|
612 | known to libpng is named in the list, it will be handled as unknown,
|
---|
613 | according to the "keep" directive. If a chunk is named in successive
|
---|
614 | instances of png_set_keep_unknown_chunks(), the final instance will
|
---|
615 | take precedence. The IHDR and IEND chunks should not be named in
|
---|
616 | chunk_list; if they are, libpng will process them normally anyway.
|
---|
617 | If you know that your application will never make use of some particular
|
---|
618 | chunks, use PNG_HANDLE_CHUNK_NEVER (or 1) as demonstrated below.
|
---|
619 |
|
---|
620 | Here is an example of the usage of png_set_keep_unknown_chunks(),
|
---|
621 | where the private "vpAg" chunk will later be processed by a user chunk
|
---|
622 | callback function:
|
---|
623 |
|
---|
624 | png_byte vpAg[5]={118, 112, 65, 103, (png_byte) '\0'};
|
---|
625 |
|
---|
626 | #if defined(PNG_UNKNOWN_CHUNKS_SUPPORTED)
|
---|
627 | png_byte unused_chunks[]=
|
---|
628 | {
|
---|
629 | 104, 73, 83, 84, (png_byte) '\0', /* hIST */
|
---|
630 | 105, 84, 88, 116, (png_byte) '\0', /* iTXt */
|
---|
631 | 112, 67, 65, 76, (png_byte) '\0', /* pCAL */
|
---|
632 | 115, 67, 65, 76, (png_byte) '\0', /* sCAL */
|
---|
633 | 115, 80, 76, 84, (png_byte) '\0', /* sPLT */
|
---|
634 | 116, 73, 77, 69, (png_byte) '\0', /* tIME */
|
---|
635 | };
|
---|
636 | #endif
|
---|
637 |
|
---|
638 | ...
|
---|
639 |
|
---|
640 | #if defined(PNG_UNKNOWN_CHUNKS_SUPPORTED)
|
---|
641 | /* ignore all unknown chunks
|
---|
642 | * (use global setting "2" for libpng16 and earlier):
|
---|
643 | */
|
---|
644 | png_set_keep_unknown_chunks(read_ptr, 2, NULL, 0);
|
---|
645 |
|
---|
646 | /* except for vpAg: */
|
---|
647 | png_set_keep_unknown_chunks(read_ptr, 2, vpAg, 1);
|
---|
648 |
|
---|
649 | /* also ignore unused known chunks: */
|
---|
650 | png_set_keep_unknown_chunks(read_ptr, 1, unused_chunks,
|
---|
651 | (int)(sizeof unused_chunks)/5);
|
---|
652 | #endif
|
---|
653 |
|
---|
654 | User limits
|
---|
655 |
|
---|
656 | The PNG specification allows the width and height of an image to be as
|
---|
657 | large as 2^31-1 (0x7fffffff), or about 2.147 billion rows and columns.
|
---|
658 | For safety, libpng imposes a default limit of 1 million rows and columns.
|
---|
659 | Larger images will be rejected immediately with a png_error() call. If
|
---|
660 | you wish to change these limits, you can use
|
---|
661 |
|
---|
662 | png_set_user_limits(png_ptr, width_max, height_max);
|
---|
663 |
|
---|
664 | to set your own limits (libpng may reject some very wide images
|
---|
665 | anyway because of potential buffer overflow conditions).
|
---|
666 |
|
---|
667 | You should put this statement after you create the PNG structure and
|
---|
668 | before calling png_read_info(), png_read_png(), or png_process_data().
|
---|
669 |
|
---|
670 | When writing a PNG datastream, put this statement before calling
|
---|
671 | png_write_info() or png_write_png().
|
---|
672 |
|
---|
673 | If you need to retrieve the limits that are being applied, use
|
---|
674 |
|
---|
675 | width_max = png_get_user_width_max(png_ptr);
|
---|
676 | height_max = png_get_user_height_max(png_ptr);
|
---|
677 |
|
---|
678 | The PNG specification sets no limit on the number of ancillary chunks
|
---|
679 | allowed in a PNG datastream. By default, libpng imposes a limit of
|
---|
680 | a total of 1000 sPLT, tEXt, iTXt, zTXt, and unknown chunks to be stored.
|
---|
681 | If you have set up both info_ptr and end_info_ptr, the limit applies
|
---|
682 | separately to each. You can change the limit on the total number of such
|
---|
683 | chunks that will be stored, with
|
---|
684 |
|
---|
685 | png_set_chunk_cache_max(png_ptr, user_chunk_cache_max);
|
---|
686 |
|
---|
687 | where 0x7fffffffL means unlimited. You can retrieve this limit with
|
---|
688 |
|
---|
689 | chunk_cache_max = png_get_chunk_cache_max(png_ptr);
|
---|
690 |
|
---|
691 | Libpng imposes a limit of 8 Megabytes (8,000,000 bytes) on the amount of
|
---|
692 | memory that any chunk other than IDAT can occupy, originally or when
|
---|
693 | decompressed (prior to libpng-1.6.32 the limit was only applied to compressed
|
---|
694 | chunks after decompression). You can change this limit with
|
---|
695 |
|
---|
696 | png_set_chunk_malloc_max(png_ptr, user_chunk_malloc_max);
|
---|
697 |
|
---|
698 | and you can retrieve the limit with
|
---|
699 |
|
---|
700 | chunk_malloc_max = png_get_chunk_malloc_max(png_ptr);
|
---|
701 |
|
---|
702 | Any chunks that would cause either of these limits to be exceeded will
|
---|
703 | be ignored.
|
---|
704 |
|
---|
705 | Information about your system
|
---|
706 |
|
---|
707 | If you intend to display the PNG or to incorporate it in other image data you
|
---|
708 | need to tell libpng information about your display or drawing surface so that
|
---|
709 | libpng can convert the values in the image to match the display.
|
---|
710 |
|
---|
711 | From libpng-1.5.4 this information can be set before reading the PNG file
|
---|
712 | header. In earlier versions png_set_gamma() existed but behaved incorrectly if
|
---|
713 | called before the PNG file header had been read and png_set_alpha_mode() did not
|
---|
714 | exist.
|
---|
715 |
|
---|
716 | If you need to support versions prior to libpng-1.5.4 test the version number
|
---|
717 | as illustrated below using "PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10504" and follow the procedures
|
---|
718 | described in the appropriate manual page.
|
---|
719 |
|
---|
720 | You give libpng the encoding expected by your system expressed as a 'gamma'
|
---|
721 | value. You can also specify a default encoding for the PNG file in
|
---|
722 | case the required information is missing from the file. By default libpng
|
---|
723 | assumes that the PNG data matches your system, to keep this default call:
|
---|
724 |
|
---|
725 | png_set_gamma(png_ptr, screen_gamma, output_gamma);
|
---|
726 |
|
---|
727 | or you can use the fixed point equivalent:
|
---|
728 |
|
---|
729 | png_set_gamma_fixed(png_ptr, PNG_FP_1*screen_gamma,
|
---|
730 | PNG_FP_1*output_gamma);
|
---|
731 |
|
---|
732 | If you don't know the gamma for your system it is probably 2.2 - a good
|
---|
733 | approximation to the IEC standard for display systems (sRGB). If images are
|
---|
734 | too contrasty or washed out you got the value wrong - check your system
|
---|
735 | documentation!
|
---|
736 |
|
---|
737 | Many systems permit the system gamma to be changed via a lookup table in the
|
---|
738 | display driver, a few systems, including older Macs, change the response by
|
---|
739 | default. As of 1.5.4 three special values are available to handle common
|
---|
740 | situations:
|
---|
741 |
|
---|
742 | PNG_DEFAULT_sRGB: Indicates that the system conforms to the
|
---|
743 | IEC 61966-2-1 standard. This matches almost
|
---|
744 | all systems.
|
---|
745 | PNG_GAMMA_MAC_18: Indicates that the system is an older
|
---|
746 | (pre Mac OS 10.6) Apple Macintosh system with
|
---|
747 | the default settings.
|
---|
748 | PNG_GAMMA_LINEAR: Just the fixed point value for 1.0 - indicates
|
---|
749 | that the system expects data with no gamma
|
---|
750 | encoding.
|
---|
751 |
|
---|
752 | You would use the linear (unencoded) value if you need to process the pixel
|
---|
753 | values further because this avoids the need to decode and re-encode each
|
---|
754 | component value whenever arithmetic is performed. A lot of graphics software
|
---|
755 | uses linear values for this reason, often with higher precision component values
|
---|
756 | to preserve overall accuracy.
|
---|
757 |
|
---|
758 |
|
---|
759 | The output_gamma value expresses how to decode the output values, not how
|
---|
760 | they are encoded. The values used correspond to the normal numbers used to
|
---|
761 | describe the overall gamma of a computer display system; for example 2.2 for
|
---|
762 | an sRGB conformant system. The values are scaled by 100000 in the _fixed
|
---|
763 | version of the API (so 220000 for sRGB.)
|
---|
764 |
|
---|
765 | The inverse of the value is always used to provide a default for the PNG file
|
---|
766 | encoding if it has no gAMA chunk and if png_set_gamma() has not been called
|
---|
767 | to override the PNG gamma information.
|
---|
768 |
|
---|
769 | When the ALPHA_OPTIMIZED mode is selected the output gamma is used to encode
|
---|
770 | opaque pixels however pixels with lower alpha values are not encoded,
|
---|
771 | regardless of the output gamma setting.
|
---|
772 |
|
---|
773 | When the standard Porter Duff handling is requested with mode 1 the output
|
---|
774 | encoding is set to be linear and the output_gamma value is only relevant
|
---|
775 | as a default for input data that has no gamma information. The linear output
|
---|
776 | encoding will be overridden if png_set_gamma() is called - the results may be
|
---|
777 | highly unexpected!
|
---|
778 |
|
---|
779 | The following numbers are derived from the sRGB standard and the research
|
---|
780 | behind it. sRGB is defined to be approximated by a PNG gAMA chunk value of
|
---|
781 | 0.45455 (1/2.2) for PNG. The value implicitly includes any viewing
|
---|
782 | correction required to take account of any differences in the color
|
---|
783 | environment of the original scene and the intended display environment; the
|
---|
784 | value expresses how to *decode* the image for display, not how the original
|
---|
785 | data was *encoded*.
|
---|
786 |
|
---|
787 | sRGB provides a peg for the PNG standard by defining a viewing environment.
|
---|
788 | sRGB itself, and earlier TV standards, actually use a more complex transform
|
---|
789 | (a linear portion then a gamma 2.4 power law) than PNG can express. (PNG is
|
---|
790 | limited to simple power laws.) By saying that an image for direct display on
|
---|
791 | an sRGB conformant system should be stored with a gAMA chunk value of 45455
|
---|
792 | (11.3.3.2 and 11.3.3.5 of the ISO PNG specification) the PNG specification
|
---|
793 | makes it possible to derive values for other display systems and
|
---|
794 | environments.
|
---|
795 |
|
---|
796 | The Mac value is deduced from the sRGB based on an assumption that the actual
|
---|
797 | extra viewing correction used in early Mac display systems was implemented as
|
---|
798 | a power 1.45 lookup table.
|
---|
799 |
|
---|
800 | Any system where a programmable lookup table is used or where the behavior of
|
---|
801 | the final display device characteristics can be changed requires system
|
---|
802 | specific code to obtain the current characteristic. However this can be
|
---|
803 | difficult and most PNG gamma correction only requires an approximate value.
|
---|
804 |
|
---|
805 | By default, if png_set_alpha_mode() is not called, libpng assumes that all
|
---|
806 | values are unencoded, linear, values and that the output device also has a
|
---|
807 | linear characteristic. This is only very rarely correct - it is invariably
|
---|
808 | better to call png_set_alpha_mode() with PNG_DEFAULT_sRGB than rely on the
|
---|
809 | default if you don't know what the right answer is!
|
---|
810 |
|
---|
811 | The special value PNG_GAMMA_MAC_18 indicates an older Mac system (pre Mac OS
|
---|
812 | 10.6) which used a correction table to implement a somewhat lower gamma on an
|
---|
813 | otherwise sRGB system.
|
---|
814 |
|
---|
815 | Both these values are reserved (not simple gamma values) in order to allow
|
---|
816 | more precise correction internally in the future.
|
---|
817 |
|
---|
818 | NOTE: the values can be passed to either the fixed or floating
|
---|
819 | point APIs, but the floating point API will also accept floating point
|
---|
820 | values.
|
---|
821 |
|
---|
822 | The second thing you may need to tell libpng about is how your system handles
|
---|
823 | alpha channel information. Some, but not all, PNG files contain an alpha
|
---|
824 | channel. To display these files correctly you need to compose the data onto a
|
---|
825 | suitable background, as described in the PNG specification.
|
---|
826 |
|
---|
827 | Libpng only supports composing onto a single color (using png_set_background;
|
---|
828 | see below). Otherwise you must do the composition yourself and, in this case,
|
---|
829 | you may need to call png_set_alpha_mode:
|
---|
830 |
|
---|
831 | #if PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10504
|
---|
832 | png_set_alpha_mode(png_ptr, mode, screen_gamma);
|
---|
833 | #else
|
---|
834 | png_set_gamma(png_ptr, screen_gamma, 1.0/screen_gamma);
|
---|
835 | #endif
|
---|
836 |
|
---|
837 | The screen_gamma value is the same as the argument to png_set_gamma; however,
|
---|
838 | how it affects the output depends on the mode. png_set_alpha_mode() sets the
|
---|
839 | file gamma default to 1/screen_gamma, so normally you don't need to call
|
---|
840 | png_set_gamma. If you need different defaults call png_set_gamma() before
|
---|
841 | png_set_alpha_mode() - if you call it after it will override the settings made
|
---|
842 | by png_set_alpha_mode().
|
---|
843 |
|
---|
844 | The mode is as follows:
|
---|
845 |
|
---|
846 | PNG_ALPHA_PNG: The data is encoded according to the PNG
|
---|
847 | specification. Red, green and blue, or gray, components are
|
---|
848 | gamma encoded color values and are not premultiplied by the
|
---|
849 | alpha value. The alpha value is a linear measure of the
|
---|
850 | contribution of the pixel to the corresponding final output pixel.
|
---|
851 |
|
---|
852 | You should normally use this format if you intend to perform
|
---|
853 | color correction on the color values; most, maybe all, color
|
---|
854 | correction software has no handling for the alpha channel and,
|
---|
855 | anyway, the math to handle pre-multiplied component values is
|
---|
856 | unnecessarily complex.
|
---|
857 |
|
---|
858 | Before you do any arithmetic on the component values you need
|
---|
859 | to remove the gamma encoding and multiply out the alpha
|
---|
860 | channel. See the PNG specification for more detail. It is
|
---|
861 | important to note that when an image with an alpha channel is
|
---|
862 | scaled, linear encoded, pre-multiplied component values must
|
---|
863 | be used!
|
---|
864 |
|
---|
865 | The remaining modes assume you don't need to do any further color correction or
|
---|
866 | that if you do, your color correction software knows all about alpha (it
|
---|
867 | probably doesn't!). They 'associate' the alpha with the color information by
|
---|
868 | storing color channel values that have been scaled by the alpha. The
|
---|
869 | advantage is that the color channels can be resampled (the image can be
|
---|
870 | scaled) in this form. The disadvantage is that normal practice is to store
|
---|
871 | linear, not (gamma) encoded, values and this requires 16-bit channels for
|
---|
872 | still images rather than the 8-bit channels that are just about sufficient if
|
---|
873 | gamma encoding is used. In addition all non-transparent pixel values,
|
---|
874 | including completely opaque ones, must be gamma encoded to produce the final
|
---|
875 | image. These are the 'STANDARD', 'ASSOCIATED' or 'PREMULTIPLIED' modes
|
---|
876 | described below (the latter being the two common names for associated alpha
|
---|
877 | color channels). Note that PNG files always contain non-associated color
|
---|
878 | channels; png_set_alpha_mode() with one of the modes causes the decoder to
|
---|
879 | convert the pixels to an associated form before returning them to your
|
---|
880 | application.
|
---|
881 |
|
---|
882 | Since it is not necessary to perform arithmetic on opaque color values so
|
---|
883 | long as they are not to be resampled and are in the final color space it is
|
---|
884 | possible to optimize the handling of alpha by storing the opaque pixels in
|
---|
885 | the PNG format (adjusted for the output color space) while storing partially
|
---|
886 | opaque pixels in the standard, linear, format. The accuracy required for
|
---|
887 | standard alpha composition is relatively low, because the pixels are
|
---|
888 | isolated, therefore typically the accuracy loss in storing 8-bit linear
|
---|
889 | values is acceptable. (This is not true if the alpha channel is used to
|
---|
890 | simulate transparency over large areas - use 16 bits or the PNG mode in
|
---|
891 | this case!) This is the 'OPTIMIZED' mode. For this mode a pixel is
|
---|
892 | treated as opaque only if the alpha value is equal to the maximum value.
|
---|
893 |
|
---|
894 | PNG_ALPHA_STANDARD: The data libpng produces is encoded in the
|
---|
895 | standard way assumed by most correctly written graphics software.
|
---|
896 | The gamma encoding will be removed by libpng and the
|
---|
897 | linear component values will be pre-multiplied by the
|
---|
898 | alpha channel.
|
---|
899 |
|
---|
900 | With this format the final image must be re-encoded to
|
---|
901 | match the display gamma before the image is displayed.
|
---|
902 | If your system doesn't do that, yet still seems to
|
---|
903 | perform arithmetic on the pixels without decoding them,
|
---|
904 | it is broken - check out the modes below.
|
---|
905 |
|
---|
906 | With PNG_ALPHA_STANDARD libpng always produces linear
|
---|
907 | component values, whatever screen_gamma you supply. The
|
---|
908 | screen_gamma value is, however, used as a default for
|
---|
909 | the file gamma if the PNG file has no gamma information.
|
---|
910 |
|
---|
911 | If you call png_set_gamma() after png_set_alpha_mode() you
|
---|
912 | will override the linear encoding. Instead the
|
---|
913 | pre-multiplied pixel values will be gamma encoded but
|
---|
914 | the alpha channel will still be linear. This may
|
---|
915 | actually match the requirements of some broken software,
|
---|
916 | but it is unlikely.
|
---|
917 |
|
---|
918 | While linear 8-bit data is often used it has
|
---|
919 | insufficient precision for any image with a reasonable
|
---|
920 | dynamic range. To avoid problems, and if your software
|
---|
921 | supports it, use png_set_expand_16() to force all
|
---|
922 | components to 16 bits.
|
---|
923 |
|
---|
924 | PNG_ALPHA_OPTIMIZED: This mode is the same as PNG_ALPHA_STANDARD
|
---|
925 | except that completely opaque pixels are gamma encoded according to
|
---|
926 | the screen_gamma value. Pixels with alpha less than 1.0
|
---|
927 | will still have linear components.
|
---|
928 |
|
---|
929 | Use this format if you have control over your
|
---|
930 | compositing software and so don't do other arithmetic
|
---|
931 | (such as scaling) on the data you get from libpng. Your
|
---|
932 | compositing software can simply copy opaque pixels to
|
---|
933 | the output but still has linear values for the
|
---|
934 | non-opaque pixels.
|
---|
935 |
|
---|
936 | In normal compositing, where the alpha channel encodes
|
---|
937 | partial pixel coverage (as opposed to broad area
|
---|
938 | translucency), the inaccuracies of the 8-bit
|
---|
939 | representation of non-opaque pixels are irrelevant.
|
---|
940 |
|
---|
941 | You can also try this format if your software is broken;
|
---|
942 | it might look better.
|
---|
943 |
|
---|
944 | PNG_ALPHA_BROKEN: This is PNG_ALPHA_STANDARD; however, all component
|
---|
945 | values, including the alpha channel are gamma encoded. This is
|
---|
946 | broken because, in practice, no implementation that uses this choice
|
---|
947 | correctly undoes the encoding before handling alpha composition. Use this
|
---|
948 | choice only if other serious errors in the software or hardware you use
|
---|
949 | mandate it. In most cases of broken software or hardware the bug in the
|
---|
950 | final display manifests as a subtle halo around composited parts of the
|
---|
951 | image. You may not even perceive this as a halo; the composited part of
|
---|
952 | the image may simply appear separate from the background, as though it had
|
---|
953 | been cut out of paper and pasted on afterward.
|
---|
954 |
|
---|
955 | If you don't have to deal with bugs in software or hardware, or if you can fix
|
---|
956 | them, there are three recommended ways of using png_set_alpha_mode():
|
---|
957 |
|
---|
958 | png_set_alpha_mode(png_ptr, PNG_ALPHA_PNG,
|
---|
959 | screen_gamma);
|
---|
960 |
|
---|
961 | You can do color correction on the result (libpng does not currently
|
---|
962 | support color correction internally). When you handle the alpha channel
|
---|
963 | you need to undo the gamma encoding and multiply out the alpha.
|
---|
964 |
|
---|
965 | png_set_alpha_mode(png_ptr, PNG_ALPHA_STANDARD,
|
---|
966 | screen_gamma);
|
---|
967 | png_set_expand_16(png_ptr);
|
---|
968 |
|
---|
969 | If you are using the high level interface, don't call png_set_expand_16();
|
---|
970 | instead pass PNG_TRANSFORM_EXPAND_16 to the interface.
|
---|
971 |
|
---|
972 | With this mode you can't do color correction, but you can do arithmetic,
|
---|
973 | including composition and scaling, on the data without further processing.
|
---|
974 |
|
---|
975 | png_set_alpha_mode(png_ptr, PNG_ALPHA_OPTIMIZED,
|
---|
976 | screen_gamma);
|
---|
977 |
|
---|
978 | You can avoid the expansion to 16-bit components with this mode, but you
|
---|
979 | lose the ability to scale the image or perform other linear arithmetic.
|
---|
980 | All you can do is compose the result onto a matching output. Since this
|
---|
981 | mode is libpng-specific you also need to write your own composition
|
---|
982 | software.
|
---|
983 |
|
---|
984 | The following are examples of calls to png_set_alpha_mode to achieve the
|
---|
985 | required overall gamma correction and, where necessary, alpha
|
---|
986 | premultiplication.
|
---|
987 |
|
---|
988 | png_set_alpha_mode(pp, PNG_ALPHA_PNG, PNG_DEFAULT_sRGB);
|
---|
989 |
|
---|
990 | Choices for the alpha_mode are
|
---|
991 |
|
---|
992 | PNG_ALPHA_PNG 0 /* according to the PNG standard */
|
---|
993 | PNG_ALPHA_STANDARD 1 /* according to Porter/Duff */
|
---|
994 | PNG_ALPHA_ASSOCIATED 1 /* as above; this is the normal practice */
|
---|
995 | PNG_ALPHA_PREMULTIPLIED 1 /* as above */
|
---|
996 | PNG_ALPHA_OPTIMIZED 2 /* 'PNG' for opaque pixels, else 'STANDARD' */
|
---|
997 | PNG_ALPHA_BROKEN 3 /* the alpha channel is gamma encoded */
|
---|
998 |
|
---|
999 | PNG_ALPHA_PNG is the default libpng handling of the alpha channel. It is not
|
---|
1000 | pre-multiplied into the color components. In addition the call states
|
---|
1001 | that the output is for a sRGB system and causes all PNG files without gAMA
|
---|
1002 | chunks to be assumed to be encoded using sRGB.
|
---|
1003 |
|
---|
1004 | png_set_alpha_mode(pp, PNG_ALPHA_PNG, PNG_GAMMA_MAC);
|
---|
1005 |
|
---|
1006 | In this case the output is assumed to be something like an sRGB conformant
|
---|
1007 | display preceded by a power-law lookup table of power 1.45. This is how
|
---|
1008 | early Mac systems behaved.
|
---|
1009 |
|
---|
1010 | png_set_alpha_mode(pp, PNG_ALPHA_STANDARD, PNG_GAMMA_LINEAR);
|
---|
1011 |
|
---|
1012 | This is the classic Jim Blinn approach and will work in academic
|
---|
1013 | environments where everything is done by the book. It has the shortcoming
|
---|
1014 | of assuming that input PNG data with no gamma information is linear - this
|
---|
1015 | is unlikely to be correct unless the PNG files were generated locally.
|
---|
1016 | Most of the time the output precision will be so low as to show
|
---|
1017 | significant banding in dark areas of the image.
|
---|
1018 |
|
---|
1019 | png_set_expand_16(pp);
|
---|
1020 | png_set_alpha_mode(pp, PNG_ALPHA_STANDARD, PNG_DEFAULT_sRGB);
|
---|
1021 |
|
---|
1022 | This is a somewhat more realistic Jim Blinn inspired approach. PNG files
|
---|
1023 | are assumed to have the sRGB encoding if not marked with a gamma value and
|
---|
1024 | the output is always 16 bits per component. This permits accurate scaling
|
---|
1025 | and processing of the data. If you know that your input PNG files were
|
---|
1026 | generated locally you might need to replace PNG_DEFAULT_sRGB with the
|
---|
1027 | correct value for your system.
|
---|
1028 |
|
---|
1029 | png_set_alpha_mode(pp, PNG_ALPHA_OPTIMIZED, PNG_DEFAULT_sRGB);
|
---|
1030 |
|
---|
1031 | If you just need to composite the PNG image onto an existing background
|
---|
1032 | and if you control the code that does this you can use the optimization
|
---|
1033 | setting. In this case you just copy completely opaque pixels to the
|
---|
1034 | output. For pixels that are not completely transparent (you just skip
|
---|
1035 | those) you do the composition math using png_composite or png_composite_16
|
---|
1036 | below then encode the resultant 8-bit or 16-bit values to match the output
|
---|
1037 | encoding.
|
---|
1038 |
|
---|
1039 | Other cases
|
---|
1040 |
|
---|
1041 | If neither the PNG nor the standard linear encoding work for you because
|
---|
1042 | of the software or hardware you use then you have a big problem. The PNG
|
---|
1043 | case will probably result in halos around the image. The linear encoding
|
---|
1044 | will probably result in a washed out, too bright, image (it's actually too
|
---|
1045 | contrasty.) Try the ALPHA_OPTIMIZED mode above - this will probably
|
---|
1046 | substantially reduce the halos. Alternatively try:
|
---|
1047 |
|
---|
1048 | png_set_alpha_mode(pp, PNG_ALPHA_BROKEN, PNG_DEFAULT_sRGB);
|
---|
1049 |
|
---|
1050 | This option will also reduce the halos, but there will be slight dark
|
---|
1051 | halos round the opaque parts of the image where the background is light.
|
---|
1052 | In the OPTIMIZED mode the halos will be light halos where the background
|
---|
1053 | is dark. Take your pick - the halos are unavoidable unless you can get
|
---|
1054 | your hardware/software fixed! (The OPTIMIZED approach is slightly
|
---|
1055 | faster.)
|
---|
1056 |
|
---|
1057 | When the default gamma of PNG files doesn't match the output gamma.
|
---|
1058 | If you have PNG files with no gamma information png_set_alpha_mode allows
|
---|
1059 | you to provide a default gamma, but it also sets the output gamma to the
|
---|
1060 | matching value. If you know your PNG files have a gamma that doesn't
|
---|
1061 | match the output you can take advantage of the fact that
|
---|
1062 | png_set_alpha_mode always sets the output gamma but only sets the PNG
|
---|
1063 | default if it is not already set:
|
---|
1064 |
|
---|
1065 | png_set_alpha_mode(pp, PNG_ALPHA_PNG, PNG_DEFAULT_sRGB);
|
---|
1066 | png_set_alpha_mode(pp, PNG_ALPHA_PNG, PNG_GAMMA_MAC);
|
---|
1067 |
|
---|
1068 | The first call sets both the default and the output gamma values, the
|
---|
1069 | second call overrides the output gamma without changing the default. This
|
---|
1070 | is easier than achieving the same effect with png_set_gamma. You must use
|
---|
1071 | PNG_ALPHA_PNG for the first call - internal checking in png_set_alpha will
|
---|
1072 | fire if more than one call to png_set_alpha_mode and png_set_background is
|
---|
1073 | made in the same read operation, however multiple calls with PNG_ALPHA_PNG
|
---|
1074 | are ignored.
|
---|
1075 |
|
---|
1076 | If you don't need, or can't handle, the alpha channel you can call
|
---|
1077 | png_set_background() to remove it by compositing against a fixed color. Don't
|
---|
1078 | call png_set_strip_alpha() to do this - it will leave spurious pixel values in
|
---|
1079 | transparent parts of this image.
|
---|
1080 |
|
---|
1081 | png_set_background(png_ptr, &background_color,
|
---|
1082 | PNG_BACKGROUND_GAMMA_SCREEN, 0, 1);
|
---|
1083 |
|
---|
1084 | The background_color is an RGB or grayscale value according to the data format
|
---|
1085 | libpng will produce for you. Because you don't yet know the format of the PNG
|
---|
1086 | file, if you call png_set_background at this point you must arrange for the
|
---|
1087 | format produced by libpng to always have 8-bit or 16-bit components and then
|
---|
1088 | store the color as an 8-bit or 16-bit color as appropriate. The color contains
|
---|
1089 | separate gray and RGB component values, so you can let libpng produce gray or
|
---|
1090 | RGB output according to the input format, but low bit depth grayscale images
|
---|
1091 | must always be converted to at least 8-bit format. (Even though low bit depth
|
---|
1092 | grayscale images can't have an alpha channel they can have a transparent
|
---|
1093 | color!)
|
---|
1094 |
|
---|
1095 | You set the transforms you need later, either as flags to the high level
|
---|
1096 | interface or libpng API calls for the low level interface. For reference the
|
---|
1097 | settings and API calls required are:
|
---|
1098 |
|
---|
1099 | 8-bit values:
|
---|
1100 | PNG_TRANSFORM_SCALE_16 | PNG_EXPAND
|
---|
1101 | png_set_expand(png_ptr); png_set_scale_16(png_ptr);
|
---|
1102 |
|
---|
1103 | If you must get exactly the same inaccurate results
|
---|
1104 | produced by default in versions prior to libpng-1.5.4,
|
---|
1105 | use PNG_TRANSFORM_STRIP_16 and png_set_strip_16(png_ptr)
|
---|
1106 | instead.
|
---|
1107 |
|
---|
1108 | 16-bit values:
|
---|
1109 | PNG_TRANSFORM_EXPAND_16
|
---|
1110 | png_set_expand_16(png_ptr);
|
---|
1111 |
|
---|
1112 | In either case palette image data will be expanded to RGB. If you just want
|
---|
1113 | color data you can add PNG_TRANSFORM_GRAY_TO_RGB or png_set_gray_to_rgb(png_ptr)
|
---|
1114 | to the list.
|
---|
1115 |
|
---|
1116 | Calling png_set_background before the PNG file header is read will not work
|
---|
1117 | prior to libpng-1.5.4. Because the failure may result in unexpected warnings or
|
---|
1118 | errors it is therefore much safer to call png_set_background after the head has
|
---|
1119 | been read. Unfortunately this means that prior to libpng-1.5.4 it cannot be
|
---|
1120 | used with the high level interface.
|
---|
1121 |
|
---|
1122 | The high-level read interface
|
---|
1123 |
|
---|
1124 | At this point there are two ways to proceed; through the high-level
|
---|
1125 | read interface, or through a sequence of low-level read operations.
|
---|
1126 | You can use the high-level interface if (a) you are willing to read
|
---|
1127 | the entire image into memory, and (b) the input transformations
|
---|
1128 | you want to do are limited to the following set:
|
---|
1129 |
|
---|
1130 | PNG_TRANSFORM_IDENTITY No transformation
|
---|
1131 | PNG_TRANSFORM_SCALE_16 Strip 16-bit samples to
|
---|
1132 | 8-bit accurately
|
---|
1133 | PNG_TRANSFORM_STRIP_16 Chop 16-bit samples to
|
---|
1134 | 8-bit less accurately
|
---|
1135 | PNG_TRANSFORM_STRIP_ALPHA Discard the alpha channel
|
---|
1136 | PNG_TRANSFORM_PACKING Expand 1, 2 and 4-bit
|
---|
1137 | samples to bytes
|
---|
1138 | PNG_TRANSFORM_PACKSWAP Change order of packed
|
---|
1139 | pixels to LSB first
|
---|
1140 | PNG_TRANSFORM_EXPAND Perform set_expand()
|
---|
1141 | PNG_TRANSFORM_INVERT_MONO Invert monochrome images
|
---|
1142 | PNG_TRANSFORM_SHIFT Normalize pixels to the
|
---|
1143 | sBIT depth
|
---|
1144 | PNG_TRANSFORM_BGR Flip RGB to BGR, RGBA
|
---|
1145 | to BGRA
|
---|
1146 | PNG_TRANSFORM_SWAP_ALPHA Flip RGBA to ARGB or GA
|
---|
1147 | to AG
|
---|
1148 | PNG_TRANSFORM_INVERT_ALPHA Change alpha from opacity
|
---|
1149 | to transparency
|
---|
1150 | PNG_TRANSFORM_SWAP_ENDIAN Byte-swap 16-bit samples
|
---|
1151 | PNG_TRANSFORM_GRAY_TO_RGB Expand grayscale samples
|
---|
1152 | to RGB (or GA to RGBA)
|
---|
1153 | PNG_TRANSFORM_EXPAND_16 Expand samples to 16 bits
|
---|
1154 |
|
---|
1155 | (This excludes setting a background color, doing gamma transformation,
|
---|
1156 | quantizing, and setting filler.) If this is the case, simply do this:
|
---|
1157 |
|
---|
1158 | png_read_png(png_ptr, info_ptr, png_transforms, NULL)
|
---|
1159 |
|
---|
1160 | where png_transforms is an integer containing the bitwise OR of some
|
---|
1161 | set of transformation flags. This call is equivalent to png_read_info(),
|
---|
1162 | followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform mask,
|
---|
1163 | then png_read_image(), and finally png_read_end().
|
---|
1164 |
|
---|
1165 | (The final parameter of this call is not yet used. Someday it might point
|
---|
1166 | to transformation parameters required by some future input transform.)
|
---|
1167 |
|
---|
1168 | You must use png_transforms and not call any png_set_transform() functions
|
---|
1169 | when you use png_read_png().
|
---|
1170 |
|
---|
1171 | After you have called png_read_png(), you can retrieve the image data
|
---|
1172 | with
|
---|
1173 |
|
---|
1174 | row_pointers = png_get_rows(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
1175 |
|
---|
1176 | where row_pointers is an array of pointers to the pixel data for each row:
|
---|
1177 |
|
---|
1178 | png_bytep row_pointers[height];
|
---|
1179 |
|
---|
1180 | If you know your image size and pixel size ahead of time, you can allocate
|
---|
1181 | row_pointers prior to calling png_read_png() with
|
---|
1182 |
|
---|
1183 | if (height > PNG_UINT_32_MAX/(sizeof (png_byte)))
|
---|
1184 | png_error (png_ptr,
|
---|
1185 | "Image is too tall to process in memory");
|
---|
1186 |
|
---|
1187 | if (width > PNG_UINT_32_MAX/pixel_size)
|
---|
1188 | png_error (png_ptr,
|
---|
1189 | "Image is too wide to process in memory");
|
---|
1190 |
|
---|
1191 | row_pointers = png_malloc(png_ptr,
|
---|
1192 | height*(sizeof (png_bytep)));
|
---|
1193 |
|
---|
1194 | for (int i=0; i<height, i++)
|
---|
1195 | row_pointers[i]=NULL; /* security precaution */
|
---|
1196 |
|
---|
1197 | for (int i=0; i<height, i++)
|
---|
1198 | row_pointers[i]=png_malloc(png_ptr,
|
---|
1199 | width*pixel_size);
|
---|
1200 |
|
---|
1201 | png_set_rows(png_ptr, info_ptr, &row_pointers);
|
---|
1202 |
|
---|
1203 | Alternatively you could allocate your image in one big block and define
|
---|
1204 | row_pointers[i] to point into the proper places in your block, but first
|
---|
1205 | be sure that your platform is able to allocate such a large buffer:
|
---|
1206 |
|
---|
1207 | /* Guard against integer overflow */
|
---|
1208 | if (height > PNG_SIZE_MAX/(width*pixel_size)) {
|
---|
1209 | png_error(png_ptr,"image_data buffer would be too large");
|
---|
1210 | }
|
---|
1211 |
|
---|
1212 | png_bytep buffer=png_malloc(png_ptr,height*width*pixel_size);
|
---|
1213 |
|
---|
1214 | for (int i=0; i<height, i++)
|
---|
1215 | row_pointers[i]=buffer+i*width*pixel_size;
|
---|
1216 |
|
---|
1217 | png_set_rows(png_ptr, info_ptr, &row_pointers);
|
---|
1218 |
|
---|
1219 | If you use png_set_rows(), the application is responsible for freeing
|
---|
1220 | row_pointers (and row_pointers[i], if they were separately allocated).
|
---|
1221 |
|
---|
1222 | If you don't allocate row_pointers ahead of time, png_read_png() will
|
---|
1223 | do it, and it'll be free'ed by libpng when you call png_destroy_*().
|
---|
1224 |
|
---|
1225 | The low-level read interface
|
---|
1226 |
|
---|
1227 | If you are going the low-level route, you are now ready to read all
|
---|
1228 | the file information up to the actual image data. You do this with a
|
---|
1229 | call to png_read_info().
|
---|
1230 |
|
---|
1231 | png_read_info(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
1232 |
|
---|
1233 | This will process all chunks up to but not including the image data.
|
---|
1234 |
|
---|
1235 | This also copies some of the data from the PNG file into the decode structure
|
---|
1236 | for use in later transformations. Important information copied in is:
|
---|
1237 |
|
---|
1238 | 1) The PNG file gamma from the gAMA chunk. This overwrites the default value
|
---|
1239 | provided by an earlier call to png_set_gamma or png_set_alpha_mode.
|
---|
1240 |
|
---|
1241 | 2) Prior to libpng-1.5.4 the background color from a bKGd chunk. This
|
---|
1242 | damages the information provided by an earlier call to png_set_background
|
---|
1243 | resulting in unexpected behavior. Libpng-1.5.4 no longer does this.
|
---|
1244 |
|
---|
1245 | 3) The number of significant bits in each component value. Libpng uses this to
|
---|
1246 | optimize gamma handling by reducing the internal lookup table sizes.
|
---|
1247 |
|
---|
1248 | 4) The transparent color information from a tRNS chunk. This can be modified by
|
---|
1249 | a later call to png_set_tRNS.
|
---|
1250 |
|
---|
1251 | Querying the info structure
|
---|
1252 |
|
---|
1253 | Functions are used to get the information from the info_ptr once it
|
---|
1254 | has been read. Note that these fields may not be completely filled
|
---|
1255 | in until png_read_end() has read the chunk data following the image.
|
---|
1256 |
|
---|
1257 | png_get_IHDR(png_ptr, info_ptr, &width, &height,
|
---|
1258 | &bit_depth, &color_type, &interlace_type,
|
---|
1259 | &compression_type, &filter_method);
|
---|
1260 |
|
---|
1261 | width - holds the width of the image
|
---|
1262 | in pixels (up to 2^31).
|
---|
1263 |
|
---|
1264 | height - holds the height of the image
|
---|
1265 | in pixels (up to 2^31).
|
---|
1266 |
|
---|
1267 | bit_depth - holds the bit depth of one of the
|
---|
1268 | image channels. (valid values are
|
---|
1269 | 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 and depend also on
|
---|
1270 | the color_type. See also
|
---|
1271 | significant bits (sBIT) below).
|
---|
1272 |
|
---|
1273 | color_type - describes which color/alpha channels
|
---|
1274 | are present.
|
---|
1275 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY
|
---|
1276 | (bit depths 1, 2, 4, 8, 16)
|
---|
1277 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY_ALPHA
|
---|
1278 | (bit depths 8, 16)
|
---|
1279 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_PALETTE
|
---|
1280 | (bit depths 1, 2, 4, 8)
|
---|
1281 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB
|
---|
1282 | (bit_depths 8, 16)
|
---|
1283 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB_ALPHA
|
---|
1284 | (bit_depths 8, 16)
|
---|
1285 |
|
---|
1286 | PNG_COLOR_MASK_PALETTE
|
---|
1287 | PNG_COLOR_MASK_COLOR
|
---|
1288 | PNG_COLOR_MASK_ALPHA
|
---|
1289 |
|
---|
1290 | interlace_type - (PNG_INTERLACE_NONE or
|
---|
1291 | PNG_INTERLACE_ADAM7)
|
---|
1292 |
|
---|
1293 | compression_type - (must be PNG_COMPRESSION_TYPE_BASE
|
---|
1294 | for PNG 1.0)
|
---|
1295 |
|
---|
1296 | filter_method - (must be PNG_FILTER_TYPE_BASE
|
---|
1297 | for PNG 1.0, and can also be
|
---|
1298 | PNG_INTRAPIXEL_DIFFERENCING if
|
---|
1299 | the PNG datastream is embedded in
|
---|
1300 | a MNG-1.0 datastream)
|
---|
1301 |
|
---|
1302 | Any of width, height, color_type, bit_depth,
|
---|
1303 | interlace_type, compression_type, or filter_method can
|
---|
1304 | be NULL if you are not interested in their values.
|
---|
1305 |
|
---|
1306 | Note that png_get_IHDR() returns 32-bit data into
|
---|
1307 | the application's width and height variables.
|
---|
1308 | This is an unsafe situation if these are not png_uint_32
|
---|
1309 | variables. In such situations, the
|
---|
1310 | png_get_image_width() and png_get_image_height()
|
---|
1311 | functions described below are safer.
|
---|
1312 |
|
---|
1313 | width = png_get_image_width(png_ptr,
|
---|
1314 | info_ptr);
|
---|
1315 |
|
---|
1316 | height = png_get_image_height(png_ptr,
|
---|
1317 | info_ptr);
|
---|
1318 |
|
---|
1319 | bit_depth = png_get_bit_depth(png_ptr,
|
---|
1320 | info_ptr);
|
---|
1321 |
|
---|
1322 | color_type = png_get_color_type(png_ptr,
|
---|
1323 | info_ptr);
|
---|
1324 |
|
---|
1325 | interlace_type = png_get_interlace_type(png_ptr,
|
---|
1326 | info_ptr);
|
---|
1327 |
|
---|
1328 | compression_type = png_get_compression_type(png_ptr,
|
---|
1329 | info_ptr);
|
---|
1330 |
|
---|
1331 | filter_method = png_get_filter_type(png_ptr,
|
---|
1332 | info_ptr);
|
---|
1333 |
|
---|
1334 | channels = png_get_channels(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
1335 |
|
---|
1336 | channels - number of channels of info for the
|
---|
1337 | color type (valid values are 1 (GRAY,
|
---|
1338 | PALETTE), 2 (GRAY_ALPHA), 3 (RGB),
|
---|
1339 | 4 (RGB_ALPHA or RGB + filler byte))
|
---|
1340 |
|
---|
1341 | rowbytes = png_get_rowbytes(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
1342 |
|
---|
1343 | rowbytes - number of bytes needed to hold a row
|
---|
1344 | This value, the bit_depth, color_type,
|
---|
1345 | and the number of channels can change
|
---|
1346 | if you use transforms such as
|
---|
1347 | png_set_expand(). See
|
---|
1348 | png_read_update_info(), below.
|
---|
1349 |
|
---|
1350 | signature = png_get_signature(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
1351 |
|
---|
1352 | signature - holds the signature read from the
|
---|
1353 | file (if any). The data is kept in
|
---|
1354 | the same offset it would be if the
|
---|
1355 | whole signature were read (i.e. if an
|
---|
1356 | application had already read in 4
|
---|
1357 | bytes of signature before starting
|
---|
1358 | libpng, the remaining 4 bytes would
|
---|
1359 | be in signature[4] through signature[7]
|
---|
1360 | (see png_set_sig_bytes())).
|
---|
1361 |
|
---|
1362 | These are also important, but their validity depends on whether the chunk
|
---|
1363 | has been read. The png_get_valid(png_ptr, info_ptr, PNG_INFO_<chunk>) and
|
---|
1364 | png_get_<chunk>(png_ptr, info_ptr, ...) functions return non-zero if the
|
---|
1365 | data has been read, or zero if it is missing. The parameters to the
|
---|
1366 | png_get_<chunk> are set directly if they are simple data types, or a
|
---|
1367 | pointer into the info_ptr is returned for any complex types.
|
---|
1368 |
|
---|
1369 | The colorspace data from gAMA, cHRM, sRGB, iCCP, and sBIT chunks
|
---|
1370 | is simply returned to give the application information about how the
|
---|
1371 | image was encoded. Libpng itself only does transformations using the file
|
---|
1372 | gamma when combining semitransparent pixels with the background color, and,
|
---|
1373 | since libpng-1.6.0, when converting between 8-bit sRGB and 16-bit linear pixels
|
---|
1374 | within the simplified API. Libpng also uses the file gamma when converting
|
---|
1375 | RGB to gray, beginning with libpng-1.0.5, if the application calls
|
---|
1376 | png_set_rgb_to_gray()).
|
---|
1377 |
|
---|
1378 | png_get_PLTE(png_ptr, info_ptr, &palette,
|
---|
1379 | &num_palette);
|
---|
1380 |
|
---|
1381 | palette - the palette for the file
|
---|
1382 | (array of png_color)
|
---|
1383 |
|
---|
1384 | num_palette - number of entries in the palette
|
---|
1385 |
|
---|
1386 | png_get_gAMA(png_ptr, info_ptr, &file_gamma);
|
---|
1387 | png_get_gAMA_fixed(png_ptr, info_ptr, &int_file_gamma);
|
---|
1388 |
|
---|
1389 | file_gamma - the gamma at which the file is
|
---|
1390 | written (PNG_INFO_gAMA)
|
---|
1391 |
|
---|
1392 | int_file_gamma - 100,000 times the gamma at which the
|
---|
1393 | file is written
|
---|
1394 |
|
---|
1395 | png_get_cHRM(png_ptr, info_ptr, &white_x, &white_y, &red_x,
|
---|
1396 | &red_y, &green_x, &green_y, &blue_x, &blue_y)
|
---|
1397 | png_get_cHRM_XYZ(png_ptr, info_ptr, &red_X, &red_Y, &red_Z,
|
---|
1398 | &green_X, &green_Y, &green_Z, &blue_X, &blue_Y,
|
---|
1399 | &blue_Z)
|
---|
1400 | png_get_cHRM_fixed(png_ptr, info_ptr, &int_white_x,
|
---|
1401 | &int_white_y, &int_red_x, &int_red_y,
|
---|
1402 | &int_green_x, &int_green_y, &int_blue_x,
|
---|
1403 | &int_blue_y)
|
---|
1404 | png_get_cHRM_XYZ_fixed(png_ptr, info_ptr, &int_red_X, &int_red_Y,
|
---|
1405 | &int_red_Z, &int_green_X, &int_green_Y,
|
---|
1406 | &int_green_Z, &int_blue_X, &int_blue_Y,
|
---|
1407 | &int_blue_Z)
|
---|
1408 |
|
---|
1409 | {white,red,green,blue}_{x,y}
|
---|
1410 | A color space encoding specified using the
|
---|
1411 | chromaticities of the end points and the
|
---|
1412 | white point. (PNG_INFO_cHRM)
|
---|
1413 |
|
---|
1414 | {red,green,blue}_{X,Y,Z}
|
---|
1415 | A color space encoding specified using the
|
---|
1416 | encoding end points - the CIE tristimulus
|
---|
1417 | specification of the intended color of the red,
|
---|
1418 | green and blue channels in the PNG RGB data.
|
---|
1419 | The white point is simply the sum of the three
|
---|
1420 | end points. (PNG_INFO_cHRM)
|
---|
1421 |
|
---|
1422 | png_get_sRGB(png_ptr, info_ptr, &srgb_intent);
|
---|
1423 |
|
---|
1424 | srgb_intent - the rendering intent (PNG_INFO_sRGB)
|
---|
1425 | The presence of the sRGB chunk
|
---|
1426 | means that the pixel data is in the
|
---|
1427 | sRGB color space. This chunk also
|
---|
1428 | implies specific values of gAMA and
|
---|
1429 | cHRM.
|
---|
1430 |
|
---|
1431 | png_get_iCCP(png_ptr, info_ptr, &name,
|
---|
1432 | &compression_type, &profile, &proflen);
|
---|
1433 |
|
---|
1434 | name - The profile name.
|
---|
1435 |
|
---|
1436 | compression_type - The compression type; always
|
---|
1437 | PNG_COMPRESSION_TYPE_BASE for PNG 1.0.
|
---|
1438 | You may give NULL to this argument to
|
---|
1439 | ignore it.
|
---|
1440 |
|
---|
1441 | profile - International Color Consortium color
|
---|
1442 | profile data. May contain NULs.
|
---|
1443 |
|
---|
1444 | proflen - length of profile data in bytes.
|
---|
1445 |
|
---|
1446 | png_get_sBIT(png_ptr, info_ptr, &sig_bit);
|
---|
1447 |
|
---|
1448 | sig_bit - the number of significant bits for
|
---|
1449 | (PNG_INFO_sBIT) each of the gray,
|
---|
1450 | red, green, and blue channels,
|
---|
1451 | whichever are appropriate for the
|
---|
1452 | given color type (png_color_16)
|
---|
1453 |
|
---|
1454 | png_get_tRNS(png_ptr, info_ptr, &trans_alpha,
|
---|
1455 | &num_trans, &trans_color);
|
---|
1456 |
|
---|
1457 | trans_alpha - array of alpha (transparency)
|
---|
1458 | entries for palette (PNG_INFO_tRNS)
|
---|
1459 |
|
---|
1460 | num_trans - number of transparent entries
|
---|
1461 | (PNG_INFO_tRNS)
|
---|
1462 |
|
---|
1463 | trans_color - graylevel or color sample values of
|
---|
1464 | the single transparent color for
|
---|
1465 | non-paletted images (PNG_INFO_tRNS)
|
---|
1466 |
|
---|
1467 | png_get_eXIf_1(png_ptr, info_ptr, &num_exif, &exif);
|
---|
1468 | (PNG_INFO_eXIf)
|
---|
1469 |
|
---|
1470 | exif - Exif profile (array of png_byte)
|
---|
1471 |
|
---|
1472 | png_get_hIST(png_ptr, info_ptr, &hist);
|
---|
1473 | (PNG_INFO_hIST)
|
---|
1474 |
|
---|
1475 | hist - histogram of palette (array of
|
---|
1476 | png_uint_16)
|
---|
1477 |
|
---|
1478 | png_get_tIME(png_ptr, info_ptr, &mod_time);
|
---|
1479 |
|
---|
1480 | mod_time - time image was last modified
|
---|
1481 | (PNG_VALID_tIME)
|
---|
1482 |
|
---|
1483 | png_get_bKGD(png_ptr, info_ptr, &background);
|
---|
1484 |
|
---|
1485 | background - background color (of type
|
---|
1486 | png_color_16p) (PNG_VALID_bKGD)
|
---|
1487 | valid 16-bit red, green and blue
|
---|
1488 | values, regardless of color_type
|
---|
1489 |
|
---|
1490 | num_comments = png_get_text(png_ptr, info_ptr,
|
---|
1491 | &text_ptr, &num_text);
|
---|
1492 |
|
---|
1493 | num_comments - number of comments
|
---|
1494 |
|
---|
1495 | text_ptr - array of png_text holding image
|
---|
1496 | comments
|
---|
1497 |
|
---|
1498 | text_ptr[i].compression - type of compression used
|
---|
1499 | on "text" PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_NONE
|
---|
1500 | PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_zTXt
|
---|
1501 | PNG_ITXT_COMPRESSION_NONE
|
---|
1502 | PNG_ITXT_COMPRESSION_zTXt
|
---|
1503 |
|
---|
1504 | text_ptr[i].key - keyword for comment. Must contain
|
---|
1505 | 1-79 characters.
|
---|
1506 |
|
---|
1507 | text_ptr[i].text - text comments for current
|
---|
1508 | keyword. Can be empty.
|
---|
1509 |
|
---|
1510 | text_ptr[i].text_length - length of text string,
|
---|
1511 | after decompression, 0 for iTXt
|
---|
1512 |
|
---|
1513 | text_ptr[i].itxt_length - length of itxt string,
|
---|
1514 | after decompression, 0 for tEXt/zTXt
|
---|
1515 |
|
---|
1516 | text_ptr[i].lang - language of comment (empty
|
---|
1517 | string for unknown).
|
---|
1518 |
|
---|
1519 | text_ptr[i].lang_key - keyword in UTF-8
|
---|
1520 | (empty string for unknown).
|
---|
1521 |
|
---|
1522 | Note that the itxt_length, lang, and lang_key
|
---|
1523 | members of the text_ptr structure only exist when the
|
---|
1524 | library is built with iTXt chunk support. Prior to
|
---|
1525 | libpng-1.4.0 the library was built by default without
|
---|
1526 | iTXt support. Also note that when iTXt is supported,
|
---|
1527 | they contain NULL pointers when the "compression"
|
---|
1528 | field contains PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_NONE or
|
---|
1529 | PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_zTXt.
|
---|
1530 |
|
---|
1531 | num_text - number of comments (same as
|
---|
1532 | num_comments; you can put NULL here
|
---|
1533 | to avoid the duplication)
|
---|
1534 |
|
---|
1535 | Note while png_set_text() will accept text, language,
|
---|
1536 | and translated keywords that can be NULL pointers, the
|
---|
1537 | structure returned by png_get_text will always contain
|
---|
1538 | regular zero-terminated C strings. They might be
|
---|
1539 | empty strings but they will never be NULL pointers.
|
---|
1540 |
|
---|
1541 | num_spalettes = png_get_sPLT(png_ptr, info_ptr,
|
---|
1542 | &palette_ptr);
|
---|
1543 |
|
---|
1544 | num_spalettes - number of sPLT chunks read.
|
---|
1545 |
|
---|
1546 | palette_ptr - array of palette structures holding
|
---|
1547 | contents of one or more sPLT chunks
|
---|
1548 | read.
|
---|
1549 |
|
---|
1550 | png_get_oFFs(png_ptr, info_ptr, &offset_x, &offset_y,
|
---|
1551 | &unit_type);
|
---|
1552 |
|
---|
1553 | offset_x - positive offset from the left edge
|
---|
1554 | of the screen (can be negative)
|
---|
1555 |
|
---|
1556 | offset_y - positive offset from the top edge
|
---|
1557 | of the screen (can be negative)
|
---|
1558 |
|
---|
1559 | unit_type - PNG_OFFSET_PIXEL, PNG_OFFSET_MICROMETER
|
---|
1560 |
|
---|
1561 | png_get_pHYs(png_ptr, info_ptr, &res_x, &res_y,
|
---|
1562 | &unit_type);
|
---|
1563 |
|
---|
1564 | res_x - pixels/unit physical resolution in
|
---|
1565 | x direction
|
---|
1566 |
|
---|
1567 | res_y - pixels/unit physical resolution in
|
---|
1568 | x direction
|
---|
1569 |
|
---|
1570 | unit_type - PNG_RESOLUTION_UNKNOWN,
|
---|
1571 | PNG_RESOLUTION_METER
|
---|
1572 |
|
---|
1573 | png_get_sCAL(png_ptr, info_ptr, &unit, &width,
|
---|
1574 | &height)
|
---|
1575 |
|
---|
1576 | unit - physical scale units (an integer)
|
---|
1577 |
|
---|
1578 | width - width of a pixel in physical scale units
|
---|
1579 |
|
---|
1580 | height - height of a pixel in physical scale units
|
---|
1581 | (width and height are doubles)
|
---|
1582 |
|
---|
1583 | png_get_sCAL_s(png_ptr, info_ptr, &unit, &width,
|
---|
1584 | &height)
|
---|
1585 |
|
---|
1586 | unit - physical scale units (an integer)
|
---|
1587 |
|
---|
1588 | width - width of a pixel in physical scale units
|
---|
1589 | (expressed as a string)
|
---|
1590 |
|
---|
1591 | height - height of a pixel in physical scale units
|
---|
1592 | (width and height are strings like "2.54")
|
---|
1593 |
|
---|
1594 | num_unknown_chunks = png_get_unknown_chunks(png_ptr,
|
---|
1595 | info_ptr, &unknowns)
|
---|
1596 |
|
---|
1597 | unknowns - array of png_unknown_chunk
|
---|
1598 | structures holding unknown chunks
|
---|
1599 |
|
---|
1600 | unknowns[i].name - name of unknown chunk
|
---|
1601 |
|
---|
1602 | unknowns[i].data - data of unknown chunk
|
---|
1603 |
|
---|
1604 | unknowns[i].size - size of unknown chunk's data
|
---|
1605 |
|
---|
1606 | unknowns[i].location - position of chunk in file
|
---|
1607 |
|
---|
1608 | The value of "i" corresponds to the order in which the
|
---|
1609 | chunks were read from the PNG file or inserted with the
|
---|
1610 | png_set_unknown_chunks() function.
|
---|
1611 |
|
---|
1612 | The value of "location" is a bitwise "or" of
|
---|
1613 |
|
---|
1614 | PNG_HAVE_IHDR (0x01)
|
---|
1615 | PNG_HAVE_PLTE (0x02)
|
---|
1616 | PNG_AFTER_IDAT (0x08)
|
---|
1617 |
|
---|
1618 | The data from the pHYs chunk can be retrieved in several convenient
|
---|
1619 | forms:
|
---|
1620 |
|
---|
1621 | res_x = png_get_x_pixels_per_meter(png_ptr,
|
---|
1622 | info_ptr)
|
---|
1623 |
|
---|
1624 | res_y = png_get_y_pixels_per_meter(png_ptr,
|
---|
1625 | info_ptr)
|
---|
1626 |
|
---|
1627 | res_x_and_y = png_get_pixels_per_meter(png_ptr,
|
---|
1628 | info_ptr)
|
---|
1629 |
|
---|
1630 | res_x = png_get_x_pixels_per_inch(png_ptr,
|
---|
1631 | info_ptr)
|
---|
1632 |
|
---|
1633 | res_y = png_get_y_pixels_per_inch(png_ptr,
|
---|
1634 | info_ptr)
|
---|
1635 |
|
---|
1636 | res_x_and_y = png_get_pixels_per_inch(png_ptr,
|
---|
1637 | info_ptr)
|
---|
1638 |
|
---|
1639 | aspect_ratio = png_get_pixel_aspect_ratio(png_ptr,
|
---|
1640 | info_ptr)
|
---|
1641 |
|
---|
1642 | Each of these returns 0 [signifying "unknown"] if
|
---|
1643 | the data is not present or if res_x is 0;
|
---|
1644 | res_x_and_y is 0 if res_x != res_y
|
---|
1645 |
|
---|
1646 | Note that because of the way the resolutions are
|
---|
1647 | stored internally, the inch conversions won't
|
---|
1648 | come out to exactly even number. For example,
|
---|
1649 | 72 dpi is stored as 0.28346 pixels/meter, and
|
---|
1650 | when this is retrieved it is 71.9988 dpi, so
|
---|
1651 | be sure to round the returned value appropriately
|
---|
1652 | if you want to display a reasonable-looking result.
|
---|
1653 |
|
---|
1654 | The data from the oFFs chunk can be retrieved in several convenient
|
---|
1655 | forms:
|
---|
1656 |
|
---|
1657 | x_offset = png_get_x_offset_microns(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
1658 |
|
---|
1659 | y_offset = png_get_y_offset_microns(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
1660 |
|
---|
1661 | x_offset = png_get_x_offset_inches(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
1662 |
|
---|
1663 | y_offset = png_get_y_offset_inches(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
1664 |
|
---|
1665 | Each of these returns 0 [signifying "unknown" if both
|
---|
1666 | x and y are 0] if the data is not present or if the
|
---|
1667 | chunk is present but the unit is the pixel. The
|
---|
1668 | remark about inexact inch conversions applies here
|
---|
1669 | as well, because a value in inches can't always be
|
---|
1670 | converted to microns and back without some loss
|
---|
1671 | of precision.
|
---|
1672 |
|
---|
1673 | For more information, see the
|
---|
1674 | PNG specification for chunk contents. Be careful with trusting
|
---|
1675 | rowbytes, as some of the transformations could increase the space
|
---|
1676 | needed to hold a row (expand, filler, gray_to_rgb, etc.).
|
---|
1677 | See png_read_update_info(), below.
|
---|
1678 |
|
---|
1679 | A quick word about text_ptr and num_text. PNG stores comments in
|
---|
1680 | keyword/text pairs, one pair per chunk, with no limit on the number
|
---|
1681 | of text chunks, and a 2^31 byte limit on their size. While there are
|
---|
1682 | suggested keywords, there is no requirement to restrict the use to these
|
---|
1683 | strings. It is strongly suggested that keywords and text be sensible
|
---|
1684 | to humans (that's the point), so don't use abbreviations. Non-printing
|
---|
1685 | symbols are not allowed. See the PNG specification for more details.
|
---|
1686 | There is also no requirement to have text after the keyword.
|
---|
1687 |
|
---|
1688 | Keywords should be limited to 79 Latin-1 characters without leading or
|
---|
1689 | trailing spaces, but non-consecutive spaces are allowed within the
|
---|
1690 | keyword. It is possible to have the same keyword any number of times.
|
---|
1691 | The text_ptr is an array of png_text structures, each holding a
|
---|
1692 | pointer to a language string, a pointer to a keyword and a pointer to
|
---|
1693 | a text string. The text string, language code, and translated
|
---|
1694 | keyword may be empty or NULL pointers. The keyword/text
|
---|
1695 | pairs are put into the array in the order that they are received.
|
---|
1696 | However, some or all of the text chunks may be after the image, so, to
|
---|
1697 | make sure you have read all the text chunks, don't mess with these
|
---|
1698 | until after you read the stuff after the image. This will be
|
---|
1699 | mentioned again below in the discussion that goes with png_read_end().
|
---|
1700 |
|
---|
1701 | Input transformations
|
---|
1702 |
|
---|
1703 | After you've read the header information, you can set up the library
|
---|
1704 | to handle any special transformations of the image data. The various
|
---|
1705 | ways to transform the data will be described in the order that they
|
---|
1706 | should occur. This is important, as some of these change the color
|
---|
1707 | type and/or bit depth of the data, and some others only work on
|
---|
1708 | certain color types and bit depths.
|
---|
1709 |
|
---|
1710 | Transformations you request are ignored if they don't have any meaning for a
|
---|
1711 | particular input data format. However some transformations can have an effect
|
---|
1712 | as a result of a previous transformation. If you specify a contradictory set of
|
---|
1713 | transformations, for example both adding and removing the alpha channel, you
|
---|
1714 | cannot predict the final result.
|
---|
1715 |
|
---|
1716 | The color used for the transparency values should be supplied in the same
|
---|
1717 | format/depth as the current image data. It is stored in the same format/depth
|
---|
1718 | as the image data in a tRNS chunk, so this is what libpng expects for this data.
|
---|
1719 |
|
---|
1720 | The color used for the background value depends on the need_expand argument as
|
---|
1721 | described below.
|
---|
1722 |
|
---|
1723 | Data will be decoded into the supplied row buffers packed into bytes
|
---|
1724 | unless the library has been told to transform it into another format.
|
---|
1725 | For example, 4 bit/pixel paletted or grayscale data will be returned
|
---|
1726 | 2 pixels/byte with the leftmost pixel in the high-order bits of the byte,
|
---|
1727 | unless png_set_packing() is called. 8-bit RGB data will be stored
|
---|
1728 | in RGB RGB RGB format unless png_set_filler() or png_set_add_alpha()
|
---|
1729 | is called to insert filler bytes, either before or after each RGB triplet.
|
---|
1730 |
|
---|
1731 | 16-bit RGB data will be returned RRGGBB RRGGBB, with the most significant
|
---|
1732 | byte of the color value first, unless png_set_scale_16() is called to
|
---|
1733 | transform it to regular RGB RGB triplets, or png_set_filler() or
|
---|
1734 | png_set_add alpha() is called to insert two filler bytes, either before
|
---|
1735 | or after each RRGGBB triplet. Similarly, 8-bit or 16-bit grayscale data can
|
---|
1736 | be modified with png_set_filler(), png_set_add_alpha(), png_set_strip_16(),
|
---|
1737 | or png_set_scale_16().
|
---|
1738 |
|
---|
1739 | The following code transforms grayscale images of less than 8 to 8 bits,
|
---|
1740 | changes paletted images to RGB, and adds a full alpha channel if there is
|
---|
1741 | transparency information in a tRNS chunk. This is most useful on
|
---|
1742 | grayscale images with bit depths of 2 or 4 or if there is a multiple-image
|
---|
1743 | viewing application that wishes to treat all images in the same way.
|
---|
1744 |
|
---|
1745 | if (color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_PALETTE)
|
---|
1746 | png_set_palette_to_rgb(png_ptr);
|
---|
1747 |
|
---|
1748 | if (png_get_valid(png_ptr, info_ptr,
|
---|
1749 | PNG_INFO_tRNS)) png_set_tRNS_to_alpha(png_ptr);
|
---|
1750 |
|
---|
1751 | if (color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY &&
|
---|
1752 | bit_depth < 8) png_set_expand_gray_1_2_4_to_8(png_ptr);
|
---|
1753 |
|
---|
1754 | The first two functions are actually aliases for png_set_expand(), added
|
---|
1755 | in libpng version 1.0.4, with the function names expanded to improve code
|
---|
1756 | readability. In some future version they may actually do different
|
---|
1757 | things.
|
---|
1758 |
|
---|
1759 | As of libpng version 1.2.9, png_set_expand_gray_1_2_4_to_8() was
|
---|
1760 | added. It expands the sample depth without changing tRNS to alpha.
|
---|
1761 |
|
---|
1762 | As of libpng version 1.5.2, png_set_expand_16() was added. It behaves as
|
---|
1763 | png_set_expand(); however, the resultant channels have 16 bits rather than 8.
|
---|
1764 | Use this when the output color or gray channels are made linear to avoid fairly
|
---|
1765 | severe accuracy loss.
|
---|
1766 |
|
---|
1767 | if (bit_depth < 16)
|
---|
1768 | png_set_expand_16(png_ptr);
|
---|
1769 |
|
---|
1770 | PNG can have files with 16 bits per channel. If you only can handle
|
---|
1771 | 8 bits per channel, this will strip the pixels down to 8-bit.
|
---|
1772 |
|
---|
1773 | if (bit_depth == 16)
|
---|
1774 | #if PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10504
|
---|
1775 | png_set_scale_16(png_ptr);
|
---|
1776 | #else
|
---|
1777 | png_set_strip_16(png_ptr);
|
---|
1778 | #endif
|
---|
1779 |
|
---|
1780 | (The more accurate "png_set_scale_16()" API became available in libpng version
|
---|
1781 | 1.5.4).
|
---|
1782 |
|
---|
1783 | If you need to process the alpha channel on the image separately from the image
|
---|
1784 | data (for example if you convert it to a bitmap mask) it is possible to have
|
---|
1785 | libpng strip the channel leaving just RGB or gray data:
|
---|
1786 |
|
---|
1787 | if (color_type & PNG_COLOR_MASK_ALPHA)
|
---|
1788 | png_set_strip_alpha(png_ptr);
|
---|
1789 |
|
---|
1790 | If you strip the alpha channel you need to find some other way of dealing with
|
---|
1791 | the information. If, instead, you want to convert the image to an opaque
|
---|
1792 | version with no alpha channel use png_set_background; see below.
|
---|
1793 |
|
---|
1794 | As of libpng version 1.5.2, almost all useful expansions are supported, the
|
---|
1795 | major ommissions are conversion of grayscale to indexed images (which can be
|
---|
1796 | done trivially in the application) and conversion of indexed to grayscale (which
|
---|
1797 | can be done by a trivial manipulation of the palette.)
|
---|
1798 |
|
---|
1799 | In the following table, the 01 means grayscale with depth<8, 31 means
|
---|
1800 | indexed with depth<8, other numerals represent the color type, "T" means
|
---|
1801 | the tRNS chunk is present, A means an alpha channel is present, and O
|
---|
1802 | means tRNS or alpha is present but all pixels in the image are opaque.
|
---|
1803 |
|
---|
1804 | FROM 01 31 0 0T 0O 2 2T 2O 3 3T 3O 4A 4O 6A 6O
|
---|
1805 | TO
|
---|
1806 | 01 - [G] - - - - - - - - - - - - -
|
---|
1807 | 31 [Q] Q [Q] [Q] [Q] Q Q Q Q Q Q [Q] [Q] Q Q
|
---|
1808 | 0 1 G + . . G G G G G G B B GB GB
|
---|
1809 | 0T lt Gt t + . Gt G G Gt G G Bt Bt GBt GBt
|
---|
1810 | 0O lt Gt t . + Gt Gt G Gt Gt G Bt Bt GBt GBt
|
---|
1811 | 2 C P C C C + . . C - - CB CB B B
|
---|
1812 | 2T Ct - Ct C C t + t - - - CBt CBt Bt Bt
|
---|
1813 | 2O Ct - Ct C C t t + - - - CBt CBt Bt Bt
|
---|
1814 | 3 [Q] p [Q] [Q] [Q] Q Q Q + . . [Q] [Q] Q Q
|
---|
1815 | 3T [Qt] p [Qt][Q] [Q] Qt Qt Qt t + t [Qt][Qt] Qt Qt
|
---|
1816 | 3O [Qt] p [Qt][Q] [Q] Qt Qt Qt t t + [Qt][Qt] Qt Qt
|
---|
1817 | 4A lA G A T T GA GT GT GA GT GT + BA G GBA
|
---|
1818 | 4O lA GBA A T T GA GT GT GA GT GT BA + GBA G
|
---|
1819 | 6A CA PA CA C C A T tT PA P P C CBA + BA
|
---|
1820 | 6O CA PBA CA C C A tT T PA P P CBA C BA +
|
---|
1821 |
|
---|
1822 | Within the matrix,
|
---|
1823 | "+" identifies entries where 'from' and 'to' are the same.
|
---|
1824 | "-" means the transformation is not supported.
|
---|
1825 | "." means nothing is necessary (a tRNS chunk can just be ignored).
|
---|
1826 | "t" means the transformation is obtained by png_set_tRNS.
|
---|
1827 | "A" means the transformation is obtained by png_set_add_alpha().
|
---|
1828 | "X" means the transformation is obtained by png_set_expand().
|
---|
1829 | "1" means the transformation is obtained by
|
---|
1830 | png_set_expand_gray_1_2_4_to_8() (and by png_set_expand()
|
---|
1831 | if there is no transparency in the original or the final
|
---|
1832 | format).
|
---|
1833 | "C" means the transformation is obtained by png_set_gray_to_rgb().
|
---|
1834 | "G" means the transformation is obtained by png_set_rgb_to_gray().
|
---|
1835 | "P" means the transformation is obtained by
|
---|
1836 | png_set_expand_palette_to_rgb().
|
---|
1837 | "p" means the transformation is obtained by png_set_packing().
|
---|
1838 | "Q" means the transformation is obtained by png_set_quantize().
|
---|
1839 | "T" means the transformation is obtained by
|
---|
1840 | png_set_tRNS_to_alpha().
|
---|
1841 | "B" means the transformation is obtained by
|
---|
1842 | png_set_background(), or png_strip_alpha().
|
---|
1843 |
|
---|
1844 | When an entry has multiple transforms listed all are required to cause the
|
---|
1845 | right overall transformation. When two transforms are separated by a comma
|
---|
1846 | either will do the job. When transforms are enclosed in [] the transform should
|
---|
1847 | do the job but this is currently unimplemented - a different format will result
|
---|
1848 | if the suggested transformations are used.
|
---|
1849 |
|
---|
1850 | In PNG files, the alpha channel in an image
|
---|
1851 | is the level of opacity. If you need the alpha channel in an image to
|
---|
1852 | be the level of transparency instead of opacity, you can invert the
|
---|
1853 | alpha channel (or the tRNS chunk data) after it's read, so that 0 is
|
---|
1854 | fully opaque and 255 (in 8-bit or paletted images) or 65535 (in 16-bit
|
---|
1855 | images) is fully transparent, with
|
---|
1856 |
|
---|
1857 | png_set_invert_alpha(png_ptr);
|
---|
1858 |
|
---|
1859 | PNG files pack pixels of bit depths 1, 2, and 4 into bytes as small as
|
---|
1860 | they can, resulting in, for example, 8 pixels per byte for 1 bit
|
---|
1861 | files. This code expands to 1 pixel per byte without changing the
|
---|
1862 | values of the pixels:
|
---|
1863 |
|
---|
1864 | if (bit_depth < 8)
|
---|
1865 | png_set_packing(png_ptr);
|
---|
1866 |
|
---|
1867 | PNG files have possible bit depths of 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16. All pixels
|
---|
1868 | stored in a PNG image have been "scaled" or "shifted" up to the next
|
---|
1869 | higher possible bit depth (e.g. from 5 bits/sample in the range [0,31]
|
---|
1870 | to 8 bits/sample in the range [0, 255]). However, it is also possible
|
---|
1871 | to convert the PNG pixel data back to the original bit depth of the
|
---|
1872 | image. This call reduces the pixels back down to the original bit depth:
|
---|
1873 |
|
---|
1874 | png_color_8p sig_bit;
|
---|
1875 |
|
---|
1876 | if (png_get_sBIT(png_ptr, info_ptr, &sig_bit))
|
---|
1877 | png_set_shift(png_ptr, sig_bit);
|
---|
1878 |
|
---|
1879 | PNG files store 3-color pixels in red, green, blue order. This code
|
---|
1880 | changes the storage of the pixels to blue, green, red:
|
---|
1881 |
|
---|
1882 | if (color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB ||
|
---|
1883 | color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB_ALPHA)
|
---|
1884 | png_set_bgr(png_ptr);
|
---|
1885 |
|
---|
1886 | PNG files store RGB pixels packed into 3 or 6 bytes. This code expands them
|
---|
1887 | into 4 or 8 bytes for windowing systems that need them in this format:
|
---|
1888 |
|
---|
1889 | if (color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB)
|
---|
1890 | png_set_filler(png_ptr, filler, PNG_FILLER_BEFORE);
|
---|
1891 |
|
---|
1892 | where "filler" is the 8-bit or 16-bit number to fill with, and the location
|
---|
1893 | is either PNG_FILLER_BEFORE or PNG_FILLER_AFTER, depending upon whether
|
---|
1894 | you want the filler before the RGB or after. When filling an 8-bit pixel,
|
---|
1895 | the least significant 8 bits of the number are used, if a 16-bit number is
|
---|
1896 | supplied. This transformation does not affect images that already have full
|
---|
1897 | alpha channels. To add an opaque alpha channel, use filler=0xffff and
|
---|
1898 | PNG_FILLER_AFTER which will generate RGBA pixels.
|
---|
1899 |
|
---|
1900 | Note that png_set_filler() does not change the color type. If you want
|
---|
1901 | to do that, you can add a true alpha channel with
|
---|
1902 |
|
---|
1903 | if (color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB ||
|
---|
1904 | color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY)
|
---|
1905 | png_set_add_alpha(png_ptr, filler, PNG_FILLER_AFTER);
|
---|
1906 |
|
---|
1907 | where "filler" contains the alpha value to assign to each pixel.
|
---|
1908 | The png_set_add_alpha() function was added in libpng-1.2.7.
|
---|
1909 |
|
---|
1910 | If you are reading an image with an alpha channel, and you need the
|
---|
1911 | data as ARGB instead of the normal PNG format RGBA:
|
---|
1912 |
|
---|
1913 | if (color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB_ALPHA)
|
---|
1914 | png_set_swap_alpha(png_ptr);
|
---|
1915 |
|
---|
1916 | For some uses, you may want a grayscale image to be represented as
|
---|
1917 | RGB. This code will do that conversion:
|
---|
1918 |
|
---|
1919 | if (color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY ||
|
---|
1920 | color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY_ALPHA)
|
---|
1921 | png_set_gray_to_rgb(png_ptr);
|
---|
1922 |
|
---|
1923 | Conversely, you can convert an RGB or RGBA image to grayscale or grayscale
|
---|
1924 | with alpha.
|
---|
1925 |
|
---|
1926 | if (color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB ||
|
---|
1927 | color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB_ALPHA)
|
---|
1928 | png_set_rgb_to_gray(png_ptr, error_action,
|
---|
1929 | double red_weight, double green_weight);
|
---|
1930 |
|
---|
1931 | error_action = 1: silently do the conversion
|
---|
1932 |
|
---|
1933 | error_action = 2: issue a warning if the original
|
---|
1934 | image has any pixel where
|
---|
1935 | red != green or red != blue
|
---|
1936 |
|
---|
1937 | error_action = 3: issue an error and abort the
|
---|
1938 | conversion if the original
|
---|
1939 | image has any pixel where
|
---|
1940 | red != green or red != blue
|
---|
1941 |
|
---|
1942 | red_weight: weight of red component
|
---|
1943 |
|
---|
1944 | green_weight: weight of green component
|
---|
1945 | If either weight is negative, default
|
---|
1946 | weights are used.
|
---|
1947 |
|
---|
1948 | In the corresponding fixed point API the red_weight and green_weight values are
|
---|
1949 | simply scaled by 100,000:
|
---|
1950 |
|
---|
1951 | png_set_rgb_to_gray(png_ptr, error_action,
|
---|
1952 | png_fixed_point red_weight,
|
---|
1953 | png_fixed_point green_weight);
|
---|
1954 |
|
---|
1955 | If you have set error_action = 1 or 2, you can
|
---|
1956 | later check whether the image really was gray, after processing
|
---|
1957 | the image rows, with the png_get_rgb_to_gray_status(png_ptr) function.
|
---|
1958 | It will return a png_byte that is zero if the image was gray or
|
---|
1959 | 1 if there were any non-gray pixels. Background and sBIT data
|
---|
1960 | will be silently converted to grayscale, using the green channel
|
---|
1961 | data for sBIT, regardless of the error_action setting.
|
---|
1962 |
|
---|
1963 | The default values come from the PNG file cHRM chunk if present; otherwise, the
|
---|
1964 | defaults correspond to the ITU-R recommendation 709, and also the sRGB color
|
---|
1965 | space, as recommended in the Charles Poynton's Colour FAQ,
|
---|
1966 | Copyright (c) 2006-11-28 Charles Poynton, in section 9:
|
---|
1967 |
|
---|
1968 | <http://www.poynton.com/notes/colour_and_gamma/ColorFAQ.html#RTFToC9>
|
---|
1969 |
|
---|
1970 | Y = 0.2126 * R + 0.7152 * G + 0.0722 * B
|
---|
1971 |
|
---|
1972 | Previous versions of this document, 1998 through 2002, recommended a slightly
|
---|
1973 | different formula:
|
---|
1974 |
|
---|
1975 | Y = 0.212671 * R + 0.715160 * G + 0.072169 * B
|
---|
1976 |
|
---|
1977 | Libpng uses an integer approximation:
|
---|
1978 |
|
---|
1979 | Y = (6968 * R + 23434 * G + 2366 * B)/32768
|
---|
1980 |
|
---|
1981 | The calculation is done in a linear colorspace, if the image gamma
|
---|
1982 | can be determined.
|
---|
1983 |
|
---|
1984 | The png_set_background() function has been described already; it tells libpng to
|
---|
1985 | composite images with alpha or simple transparency against the supplied
|
---|
1986 | background color. For compatibility with versions of libpng earlier than
|
---|
1987 | libpng-1.5.4 it is recommended that you call the function after reading the file
|
---|
1988 | header, even if you don't want to use the color in a bKGD chunk, if one exists.
|
---|
1989 |
|
---|
1990 | If the PNG file contains a bKGD chunk (PNG_INFO_bKGD valid),
|
---|
1991 | you may use this color, or supply another color more suitable for
|
---|
1992 | the current display (e.g., the background color from a web page). You
|
---|
1993 | need to tell libpng how the color is represented, both the format of the
|
---|
1994 | component values in the color (the number of bits) and the gamma encoding of the
|
---|
1995 | color. The function takes two arguments, background_gamma_mode and need_expand
|
---|
1996 | to convey this information; however, only two combinations are likely to be
|
---|
1997 | useful:
|
---|
1998 |
|
---|
1999 | png_color_16 my_background;
|
---|
2000 | png_color_16p image_background;
|
---|
2001 |
|
---|
2002 | if (png_get_bKGD(png_ptr, info_ptr, &image_background))
|
---|
2003 | png_set_background(png_ptr, image_background,
|
---|
2004 | PNG_BACKGROUND_GAMMA_FILE, 1/*needs to be expanded*/, 1);
|
---|
2005 | else
|
---|
2006 | png_set_background(png_ptr, &my_background,
|
---|
2007 | PNG_BACKGROUND_GAMMA_SCREEN, 0/*do not expand*/, 1);
|
---|
2008 |
|
---|
2009 | The second call was described above - my_background is in the format of the
|
---|
2010 | final, display, output produced by libpng. Because you now know the format of
|
---|
2011 | the PNG it is possible to avoid the need to choose either 8-bit or 16-bit
|
---|
2012 | output and to retain palette images (the palette colors will be modified
|
---|
2013 | appropriately and the tRNS chunk removed.) However, if you are doing this,
|
---|
2014 | take great care not to ask for transformations without checking first that
|
---|
2015 | they apply!
|
---|
2016 |
|
---|
2017 | In the first call the background color has the original bit depth and color type
|
---|
2018 | of the PNG file. So, for palette images the color is supplied as a palette
|
---|
2019 | index and for low bit greyscale images the color is a reduced bit value in
|
---|
2020 | image_background->gray.
|
---|
2021 |
|
---|
2022 | If you didn't call png_set_gamma() before reading the file header, for example
|
---|
2023 | if you need your code to remain compatible with older versions of libpng prior
|
---|
2024 | to libpng-1.5.4, this is the place to call it.
|
---|
2025 |
|
---|
2026 | Do not call it if you called png_set_alpha_mode(); doing so will damage the
|
---|
2027 | settings put in place by png_set_alpha_mode(). (If png_set_alpha_mode() is
|
---|
2028 | supported then you can certainly do png_set_gamma() before reading the PNG
|
---|
2029 | header.)
|
---|
2030 |
|
---|
2031 | This API unconditionally sets the screen and file gamma values, so it will
|
---|
2032 | override the value in the PNG file unless it is called before the PNG file
|
---|
2033 | reading starts. For this reason you must always call it with the PNG file
|
---|
2034 | value when you call it in this position:
|
---|
2035 |
|
---|
2036 | if (png_get_gAMA(png_ptr, info_ptr, &file_gamma))
|
---|
2037 | png_set_gamma(png_ptr, screen_gamma, file_gamma);
|
---|
2038 |
|
---|
2039 | else
|
---|
2040 | png_set_gamma(png_ptr, screen_gamma, 0.45455);
|
---|
2041 |
|
---|
2042 | If you need to reduce an RGB file to a paletted file, or if a paletted
|
---|
2043 | file has more entries than will fit on your screen, png_set_quantize()
|
---|
2044 | will do that. Note that this is a simple match quantization that merely
|
---|
2045 | finds the closest color available. This should work fairly well with
|
---|
2046 | optimized palettes, but fairly badly with linear color cubes. If you
|
---|
2047 | pass a palette that is larger than maximum_colors, the file will
|
---|
2048 | reduce the number of colors in the palette so it will fit into
|
---|
2049 | maximum_colors. If there is a histogram, libpng will use it to make
|
---|
2050 | more intelligent choices when reducing the palette. If there is no
|
---|
2051 | histogram, it may not do as good a job.
|
---|
2052 |
|
---|
2053 | if (color_type & PNG_COLOR_MASK_COLOR)
|
---|
2054 | {
|
---|
2055 | if (png_get_valid(png_ptr, info_ptr,
|
---|
2056 | PNG_INFO_PLTE))
|
---|
2057 | {
|
---|
2058 | png_uint_16p histogram = NULL;
|
---|
2059 |
|
---|
2060 | png_get_hIST(png_ptr, info_ptr,
|
---|
2061 | &histogram);
|
---|
2062 | png_set_quantize(png_ptr, palette, num_palette,
|
---|
2063 | max_screen_colors, histogram, 1);
|
---|
2064 | }
|
---|
2065 |
|
---|
2066 | else
|
---|
2067 | {
|
---|
2068 | png_color std_color_cube[MAX_SCREEN_COLORS] =
|
---|
2069 | { ... colors ... };
|
---|
2070 |
|
---|
2071 | png_set_quantize(png_ptr, std_color_cube,
|
---|
2072 | MAX_SCREEN_COLORS, MAX_SCREEN_COLORS,
|
---|
2073 | NULL,0);
|
---|
2074 | }
|
---|
2075 | }
|
---|
2076 |
|
---|
2077 | PNG files describe monochrome as black being zero and white being one.
|
---|
2078 | The following code will reverse this (make black be one and white be
|
---|
2079 | zero):
|
---|
2080 |
|
---|
2081 | if (bit_depth == 1 && color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY)
|
---|
2082 | png_set_invert_mono(png_ptr);
|
---|
2083 |
|
---|
2084 | This function can also be used to invert grayscale and gray-alpha images:
|
---|
2085 |
|
---|
2086 | if (color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY ||
|
---|
2087 | color_type == PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY_ALPHA)
|
---|
2088 | png_set_invert_mono(png_ptr);
|
---|
2089 |
|
---|
2090 | PNG files store 16-bit pixels in network byte order (big-endian,
|
---|
2091 | ie. most significant bits first). This code changes the storage to the
|
---|
2092 | other way (little-endian, i.e. least significant bits first, the
|
---|
2093 | way PCs store them):
|
---|
2094 |
|
---|
2095 | if (bit_depth == 16)
|
---|
2096 | png_set_swap(png_ptr);
|
---|
2097 |
|
---|
2098 | If you are using packed-pixel images (1, 2, or 4 bits/pixel), and you
|
---|
2099 | need to change the order the pixels are packed into bytes, you can use:
|
---|
2100 |
|
---|
2101 | if (bit_depth < 8)
|
---|
2102 | png_set_packswap(png_ptr);
|
---|
2103 |
|
---|
2104 | Finally, you can write your own transformation function if none of
|
---|
2105 | the existing ones meets your needs. This is done by setting a callback
|
---|
2106 | with
|
---|
2107 |
|
---|
2108 | png_set_read_user_transform_fn(png_ptr,
|
---|
2109 | read_transform_fn);
|
---|
2110 |
|
---|
2111 | You must supply the function
|
---|
2112 |
|
---|
2113 | void read_transform_fn(png_structp png_ptr, png_row_infop
|
---|
2114 | row_info, png_bytep data)
|
---|
2115 |
|
---|
2116 | See pngtest.c for a working example. Your function will be called
|
---|
2117 | after all of the other transformations have been processed. Take care with
|
---|
2118 | interlaced images if you do the interlace yourself - the width of the row is the
|
---|
2119 | width in 'row_info', not the overall image width.
|
---|
2120 |
|
---|
2121 | If supported, libpng provides two information routines that you can use to find
|
---|
2122 | where you are in processing the image:
|
---|
2123 |
|
---|
2124 | png_get_current_pass_number(png_structp png_ptr);
|
---|
2125 | png_get_current_row_number(png_structp png_ptr);
|
---|
2126 |
|
---|
2127 | Don't try using these outside a transform callback - firstly they are only
|
---|
2128 | supported if user transforms are supported, secondly they may well return
|
---|
2129 | unexpected results unless the row is actually being processed at the moment they
|
---|
2130 | are called.
|
---|
2131 |
|
---|
2132 | With interlaced
|
---|
2133 | images the value returned is the row in the input sub-image image. Use
|
---|
2134 | PNG_ROW_FROM_PASS_ROW(row, pass) and PNG_COL_FROM_PASS_COL(col, pass) to
|
---|
2135 | find the output pixel (x,y) given an interlaced sub-image pixel (row,col,pass).
|
---|
2136 |
|
---|
2137 | The discussion of interlace handling above contains more information on how to
|
---|
2138 | use these values.
|
---|
2139 |
|
---|
2140 | You can also set up a pointer to a user structure for use by your
|
---|
2141 | callback function, and you can inform libpng that your transform
|
---|
2142 | function will change the number of channels or bit depth with the
|
---|
2143 | function
|
---|
2144 |
|
---|
2145 | png_set_user_transform_info(png_ptr, user_ptr,
|
---|
2146 | user_depth, user_channels);
|
---|
2147 |
|
---|
2148 | The user's application, not libpng, is responsible for allocating and
|
---|
2149 | freeing any memory required for the user structure.
|
---|
2150 |
|
---|
2151 | You can retrieve the pointer via the function
|
---|
2152 | png_get_user_transform_ptr(). For example:
|
---|
2153 |
|
---|
2154 | voidp read_user_transform_ptr =
|
---|
2155 | png_get_user_transform_ptr(png_ptr);
|
---|
2156 |
|
---|
2157 | The last thing to handle is interlacing; this is covered in detail below,
|
---|
2158 | but you must call the function here if you want libpng to handle expansion
|
---|
2159 | of the interlaced image.
|
---|
2160 |
|
---|
2161 | number_of_passes = png_set_interlace_handling(png_ptr);
|
---|
2162 |
|
---|
2163 | After setting the transformations, libpng can update your png_info
|
---|
2164 | structure to reflect any transformations you've requested with this
|
---|
2165 | call.
|
---|
2166 |
|
---|
2167 | png_read_update_info(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
2168 |
|
---|
2169 | This is most useful to update the info structure's rowbytes
|
---|
2170 | field so you can use it to allocate your image memory. This function
|
---|
2171 | will also update your palette with the correct screen_gamma and
|
---|
2172 | background if these have been given with the calls above. You may
|
---|
2173 | only call png_read_update_info() once with a particular info_ptr.
|
---|
2174 |
|
---|
2175 | After you call png_read_update_info(), you can allocate any
|
---|
2176 | memory you need to hold the image. The row data is simply
|
---|
2177 | raw byte data for all forms of images. As the actual allocation
|
---|
2178 | varies among applications, no example will be given. If you
|
---|
2179 | are allocating one large chunk, you will need to build an
|
---|
2180 | array of pointers to each row, as it will be needed for some
|
---|
2181 | of the functions below.
|
---|
2182 |
|
---|
2183 | Be sure that your platform can allocate the buffer that you'll need.
|
---|
2184 | libpng internally checks for oversize width, but you'll need to
|
---|
2185 | do your own check for number_of_rows*width*pixel_size if you are using
|
---|
2186 | a multiple-row buffer:
|
---|
2187 |
|
---|
2188 | /* Guard against integer overflow */
|
---|
2189 | if (number_of_rows > PNG_SIZE_MAX/(width*pixel_size)) {
|
---|
2190 | png_error(png_ptr,"image_data buffer would be too large");
|
---|
2191 | }
|
---|
2192 |
|
---|
2193 | Remember: Before you call png_read_update_info(), the png_get_*()
|
---|
2194 | functions return the values corresponding to the original PNG image.
|
---|
2195 | After you call png_read_update_info the values refer to the image
|
---|
2196 | that libpng will output. Consequently you must call all the png_set_
|
---|
2197 | functions before you call png_read_update_info(). This is particularly
|
---|
2198 | important for png_set_interlace_handling() - if you are going to call
|
---|
2199 | png_read_update_info() you must call png_set_interlace_handling() before
|
---|
2200 | it unless you want to receive interlaced output.
|
---|
2201 |
|
---|
2202 | Reading image data
|
---|
2203 |
|
---|
2204 | After you've allocated memory, you can read the image data.
|
---|
2205 | The simplest way to do this is in one function call. If you are
|
---|
2206 | allocating enough memory to hold the whole image, you can just
|
---|
2207 | call png_read_image() and libpng will read in all the image data
|
---|
2208 | and put it in the memory area supplied. You will need to pass in
|
---|
2209 | an array of pointers to each row.
|
---|
2210 |
|
---|
2211 | This function automatically handles interlacing, so you don't
|
---|
2212 | need to call png_set_interlace_handling() (unless you call
|
---|
2213 | png_read_update_info()) or call this function multiple times, or any
|
---|
2214 | of that other stuff necessary with png_read_rows().
|
---|
2215 |
|
---|
2216 | png_read_image(png_ptr, row_pointers);
|
---|
2217 |
|
---|
2218 | where row_pointers is:
|
---|
2219 |
|
---|
2220 | png_bytep row_pointers[height];
|
---|
2221 |
|
---|
2222 | You can point to void or char or whatever you use for pixels.
|
---|
2223 |
|
---|
2224 | If you don't want to read in the whole image at once, you can
|
---|
2225 | use png_read_rows() instead. If there is no interlacing (check
|
---|
2226 | interlace_type == PNG_INTERLACE_NONE), this is simple:
|
---|
2227 |
|
---|
2228 | png_read_rows(png_ptr, row_pointers, NULL,
|
---|
2229 | number_of_rows);
|
---|
2230 |
|
---|
2231 | where row_pointers is the same as in the png_read_image() call.
|
---|
2232 |
|
---|
2233 | If you are doing this just one row at a time, you can do this with
|
---|
2234 | a single row_pointer instead of an array of row_pointers:
|
---|
2235 |
|
---|
2236 | png_bytep row_pointer = row;
|
---|
2237 | png_read_row(png_ptr, row_pointer, NULL);
|
---|
2238 |
|
---|
2239 | If the file is interlaced (interlace_type != 0 in the IHDR chunk), things
|
---|
2240 | get somewhat harder. The only current (PNG Specification version 1.2)
|
---|
2241 | interlacing type for PNG is (interlace_type == PNG_INTERLACE_ADAM7);
|
---|
2242 | a somewhat complicated 2D interlace scheme, known as Adam7, that
|
---|
2243 | breaks down an image into seven smaller images of varying size, based
|
---|
2244 | on an 8x8 grid. This number is defined (from libpng 1.5) as
|
---|
2245 | PNG_INTERLACE_ADAM7_PASSES in png.h
|
---|
2246 |
|
---|
2247 | libpng can fill out those images or it can give them to you "as is".
|
---|
2248 | It is almost always better to have libpng handle the interlacing for you.
|
---|
2249 | If you want the images filled out, there are two ways to do that. The one
|
---|
2250 | mentioned in the PNG specification is to expand each pixel to cover
|
---|
2251 | those pixels that have not been read yet (the "rectangle" method).
|
---|
2252 | This results in a blocky image for the first pass, which gradually
|
---|
2253 | smooths out as more pixels are read. The other method is the "sparkle"
|
---|
2254 | method, where pixels are drawn only in their final locations, with the
|
---|
2255 | rest of the image remaining whatever colors they were initialized to
|
---|
2256 | before the start of the read. The first method usually looks better,
|
---|
2257 | but tends to be slower, as there are more pixels to put in the rows.
|
---|
2258 |
|
---|
2259 | If, as is likely, you want libpng to expand the images, call this before
|
---|
2260 | calling png_start_read_image() or png_read_update_info():
|
---|
2261 |
|
---|
2262 | if (interlace_type == PNG_INTERLACE_ADAM7)
|
---|
2263 | number_of_passes
|
---|
2264 | = png_set_interlace_handling(png_ptr);
|
---|
2265 |
|
---|
2266 | This will return the number of passes needed. Currently, this is seven,
|
---|
2267 | but may change if another interlace type is added. This function can be
|
---|
2268 | called even if the file is not interlaced, where it will return one pass.
|
---|
2269 | You then need to read the whole image 'number_of_passes' times. Each time
|
---|
2270 | will distribute the pixels from the current pass to the correct place in
|
---|
2271 | the output image, so you need to supply the same rows to png_read_rows in
|
---|
2272 | each pass.
|
---|
2273 |
|
---|
2274 | If you are not going to display the image after each pass, but are
|
---|
2275 | going to wait until the entire image is read in, use the sparkle
|
---|
2276 | effect. This effect is faster and the end result of either method
|
---|
2277 | is exactly the same. If you are planning on displaying the image
|
---|
2278 | after each pass, the "rectangle" effect is generally considered the
|
---|
2279 | better looking one.
|
---|
2280 |
|
---|
2281 | If you only want the "sparkle" effect, just call png_read_row() or
|
---|
2282 | png_read_rows() as
|
---|
2283 | normal, with the third parameter NULL. Make sure you make pass over
|
---|
2284 | the image number_of_passes times, and you don't change the data in the
|
---|
2285 | rows between calls. You can change the locations of the data, just
|
---|
2286 | not the data. Each pass only writes the pixels appropriate for that
|
---|
2287 | pass, and assumes the data from previous passes is still valid.
|
---|
2288 |
|
---|
2289 | png_read_rows(png_ptr, row_pointers, NULL,
|
---|
2290 | number_of_rows);
|
---|
2291 | or
|
---|
2292 | png_read_row(png_ptr, row_pointers, NULL);
|
---|
2293 |
|
---|
2294 | If you only want the first effect (the rectangles), do the same as
|
---|
2295 | before except pass the row buffer in the third parameter, and leave
|
---|
2296 | the second parameter NULL.
|
---|
2297 |
|
---|
2298 | png_read_rows(png_ptr, NULL, row_pointers,
|
---|
2299 | number_of_rows);
|
---|
2300 | or
|
---|
2301 | png_read_row(png_ptr, NULL, row_pointers);
|
---|
2302 |
|
---|
2303 | If you don't want libpng to handle the interlacing details, just call
|
---|
2304 | png_read_rows() PNG_INTERLACE_ADAM7_PASSES times to read in all the images.
|
---|
2305 | Each of the images is a valid image by itself; however, you will almost
|
---|
2306 | certainly need to distribute the pixels from each sub-image to the
|
---|
2307 | correct place. This is where everything gets very tricky.
|
---|
2308 |
|
---|
2309 | If you want to retrieve the separate images you must pass the correct
|
---|
2310 | number of rows to each successive call of png_read_rows(). The calculation
|
---|
2311 | gets pretty complicated for small images, where some sub-images may
|
---|
2312 | not even exist because either their width or height ends up zero.
|
---|
2313 | libpng provides two macros to help you in 1.5 and later versions:
|
---|
2314 |
|
---|
2315 | png_uint_32 width = PNG_PASS_COLS(image_width, pass_number);
|
---|
2316 | png_uint_32 height = PNG_PASS_ROWS(image_height, pass_number);
|
---|
2317 |
|
---|
2318 | Respectively these tell you the width and height of the sub-image
|
---|
2319 | corresponding to the numbered pass. 'pass' is in in the range 0 to 6 -
|
---|
2320 | this can be confusing because the specification refers to the same passes
|
---|
2321 | as 1 to 7! Be careful, you must check both the width and height before
|
---|
2322 | calling png_read_rows() and not call it for that pass if either is zero.
|
---|
2323 |
|
---|
2324 | You can, of course, read each sub-image row by row. If you want to
|
---|
2325 | produce optimal code to make a pixel-by-pixel transformation of an
|
---|
2326 | interlaced image this is the best approach; read each row of each pass,
|
---|
2327 | transform it, and write it out to a new interlaced image.
|
---|
2328 |
|
---|
2329 | If you want to de-interlace the image yourself libpng provides further
|
---|
2330 | macros to help that tell you where to place the pixels in the output image.
|
---|
2331 | Because the interlacing scheme is rectangular - sub-image pixels are always
|
---|
2332 | arranged on a rectangular grid - all you need to know for each pass is the
|
---|
2333 | starting column and row in the output image of the first pixel plus the
|
---|
2334 | spacing between each pixel. As of libpng 1.5 there are four macros to
|
---|
2335 | retrieve this information:
|
---|
2336 |
|
---|
2337 | png_uint_32 x = PNG_PASS_START_COL(pass);
|
---|
2338 | png_uint_32 y = PNG_PASS_START_ROW(pass);
|
---|
2339 | png_uint_32 xStep = 1U << PNG_PASS_COL_SHIFT(pass);
|
---|
2340 | png_uint_32 yStep = 1U << PNG_PASS_ROW_SHIFT(pass);
|
---|
2341 |
|
---|
2342 | These allow you to write the obvious loop:
|
---|
2343 |
|
---|
2344 | png_uint_32 input_y = 0;
|
---|
2345 | png_uint_32 output_y = PNG_PASS_START_ROW(pass);
|
---|
2346 |
|
---|
2347 | while (output_y < output_image_height)
|
---|
2348 | {
|
---|
2349 | png_uint_32 input_x = 0;
|
---|
2350 | png_uint_32 output_x = PNG_PASS_START_COL(pass);
|
---|
2351 |
|
---|
2352 | while (output_x < output_image_width)
|
---|
2353 | {
|
---|
2354 | image[output_y][output_x] =
|
---|
2355 | subimage[pass][input_y][input_x++];
|
---|
2356 |
|
---|
2357 | output_x += xStep;
|
---|
2358 | }
|
---|
2359 |
|
---|
2360 | ++input_y;
|
---|
2361 | output_y += yStep;
|
---|
2362 | }
|
---|
2363 |
|
---|
2364 | Notice that the steps between successive output rows and columns are
|
---|
2365 | returned as shifts. This is possible because the pixels in the subimages
|
---|
2366 | are always a power of 2 apart - 1, 2, 4 or 8 pixels - in the original
|
---|
2367 | image. In practice you may need to directly calculate the output coordinate
|
---|
2368 | given an input coordinate. libpng provides two further macros for this
|
---|
2369 | purpose:
|
---|
2370 |
|
---|
2371 | png_uint_32 output_x = PNG_COL_FROM_PASS_COL(input_x, pass);
|
---|
2372 | png_uint_32 output_y = PNG_ROW_FROM_PASS_ROW(input_y, pass);
|
---|
2373 |
|
---|
2374 | Finally a pair of macros are provided to tell you if a particular image
|
---|
2375 | row or column appears in a given pass:
|
---|
2376 |
|
---|
2377 | int col_in_pass = PNG_COL_IN_INTERLACE_PASS(output_x, pass);
|
---|
2378 | int row_in_pass = PNG_ROW_IN_INTERLACE_PASS(output_y, pass);
|
---|
2379 |
|
---|
2380 | Bear in mind that you will probably also need to check the width and height
|
---|
2381 | of the pass in addition to the above to be sure the pass even exists!
|
---|
2382 |
|
---|
2383 | With any luck you are convinced by now that you don't want to do your own
|
---|
2384 | interlace handling. In reality normally the only good reason for doing this
|
---|
2385 | is if you are processing PNG files on a pixel-by-pixel basis and don't want
|
---|
2386 | to load the whole file into memory when it is interlaced.
|
---|
2387 |
|
---|
2388 | libpng includes a test program, pngvalid, that illustrates reading and
|
---|
2389 | writing of interlaced images. If you can't get interlacing to work in your
|
---|
2390 | code and don't want to leave it to libpng (the recommended approach), see
|
---|
2391 | how pngvalid.c does it.
|
---|
2392 |
|
---|
2393 | Finishing a sequential read
|
---|
2394 |
|
---|
2395 | After you are finished reading the image through the
|
---|
2396 | low-level interface, you can finish reading the file.
|
---|
2397 |
|
---|
2398 | If you want to use a different crc action for handling CRC errors in
|
---|
2399 | chunks after the image data, you can call png_set_crc_action()
|
---|
2400 | again at this point.
|
---|
2401 |
|
---|
2402 | If you are interested in comments or time, which may be stored either
|
---|
2403 | before or after the image data, you should pass the separate png_info
|
---|
2404 | struct if you want to keep the comments from before and after the image
|
---|
2405 | separate.
|
---|
2406 |
|
---|
2407 | png_infop end_info = png_create_info_struct(png_ptr);
|
---|
2408 |
|
---|
2409 | if (!end_info)
|
---|
2410 | {
|
---|
2411 | png_destroy_read_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr,
|
---|
2412 | (png_infopp)NULL);
|
---|
2413 | return ERROR;
|
---|
2414 | }
|
---|
2415 |
|
---|
2416 | png_read_end(png_ptr, end_info);
|
---|
2417 |
|
---|
2418 | If you are not interested, you should still call png_read_end()
|
---|
2419 | but you can pass NULL, avoiding the need to create an end_info structure.
|
---|
2420 | If you do this, libpng will not process any chunks after IDAT other than
|
---|
2421 | skipping over them and perhaps (depending on whether you have called
|
---|
2422 | png_set_crc_action) checking their CRCs while looking for the IEND chunk.
|
---|
2423 |
|
---|
2424 | png_read_end(png_ptr, (png_infop)NULL);
|
---|
2425 |
|
---|
2426 | If you don't call png_read_end(), then your file pointer will be
|
---|
2427 | left pointing to the first chunk after the last IDAT, which is probably
|
---|
2428 | not what you want if you expect to read something beyond the end of
|
---|
2429 | the PNG datastream.
|
---|
2430 |
|
---|
2431 | When you are done, you can free all memory allocated by libpng like this:
|
---|
2432 |
|
---|
2433 | png_destroy_read_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr,
|
---|
2434 | &end_info);
|
---|
2435 |
|
---|
2436 | or, if you didn't create an end_info structure,
|
---|
2437 |
|
---|
2438 | png_destroy_read_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr,
|
---|
2439 | (png_infopp)NULL);
|
---|
2440 |
|
---|
2441 | It is also possible to individually free the info_ptr members that
|
---|
2442 | point to libpng-allocated storage with the following function:
|
---|
2443 |
|
---|
2444 | png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, mask, seq)
|
---|
2445 |
|
---|
2446 | mask - identifies data to be freed, a mask
|
---|
2447 | containing the bitwise OR of one or
|
---|
2448 | more of
|
---|
2449 | PNG_FREE_PLTE, PNG_FREE_TRNS,
|
---|
2450 | PNG_FREE_HIST, PNG_FREE_ICCP,
|
---|
2451 | PNG_FREE_PCAL, PNG_FREE_ROWS,
|
---|
2452 | PNG_FREE_SCAL, PNG_FREE_SPLT,
|
---|
2453 | PNG_FREE_TEXT, PNG_FREE_UNKN,
|
---|
2454 | or simply PNG_FREE_ALL
|
---|
2455 |
|
---|
2456 | seq - sequence number of item to be freed
|
---|
2457 | (-1 for all items)
|
---|
2458 |
|
---|
2459 | This function may be safely called when the relevant storage has
|
---|
2460 | already been freed, or has not yet been allocated, or was allocated
|
---|
2461 | by the user and not by libpng, and will in those cases do nothing.
|
---|
2462 | The "seq" parameter is ignored if only one item of the selected data
|
---|
2463 | type, such as PLTE, is allowed. If "seq" is not -1, and multiple items
|
---|
2464 | are allowed for the data type identified in the mask, such as text or
|
---|
2465 | sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure is freed, where n is "seq".
|
---|
2466 |
|
---|
2467 | The default behavior is only to free data that was allocated internally
|
---|
2468 | by libpng. This can be changed, so that libpng will not free the data,
|
---|
2469 | or so that it will free data that was allocated by the user with png_malloc()
|
---|
2470 | or png_calloc() and passed in via a png_set_*() function, with
|
---|
2471 |
|
---|
2472 | png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, mask)
|
---|
2473 |
|
---|
2474 | freer - one of
|
---|
2475 | PNG_DESTROY_WILL_FREE_DATA
|
---|
2476 | PNG_SET_WILL_FREE_DATA
|
---|
2477 | PNG_USER_WILL_FREE_DATA
|
---|
2478 |
|
---|
2479 | mask - which data elements are affected
|
---|
2480 | same choices as in png_free_data()
|
---|
2481 |
|
---|
2482 | This function only affects data that has already been allocated.
|
---|
2483 | You can call this function after reading the PNG data but before calling
|
---|
2484 | any png_set_*() functions, to control whether the user or the png_set_*()
|
---|
2485 | function is responsible for freeing any existing data that might be present,
|
---|
2486 | and again after the png_set_*() functions to control whether the user
|
---|
2487 | or png_destroy_*() is supposed to free the data. When the user assumes
|
---|
2488 | responsibility for libpng-allocated data, the application must use
|
---|
2489 | png_free() to free it, and when the user transfers responsibility to libpng
|
---|
2490 | for data that the user has allocated, the user must have used png_malloc()
|
---|
2491 | or png_calloc() to allocate it.
|
---|
2492 |
|
---|
2493 | If you allocated your row_pointers in a single block, as suggested above in
|
---|
2494 | the description of the high level read interface, you must not transfer
|
---|
2495 | responsibility for freeing it to the png_set_rows or png_read_destroy function,
|
---|
2496 | because they would also try to free the individual row_pointers[i].
|
---|
2497 |
|
---|
2498 | If you allocated text_ptr.text, text_ptr.lang, and text_ptr.translated_keyword
|
---|
2499 | separately, do not transfer responsibility for freeing text_ptr to libpng,
|
---|
2500 | because when libpng fills a png_text structure it combines these members with
|
---|
2501 | the key member, and png_free_data() will free only text_ptr.key. Similarly,
|
---|
2502 | if you transfer responsibility for free'ing text_ptr from libpng to your
|
---|
2503 | application, your application must not separately free those members.
|
---|
2504 |
|
---|
2505 | The png_free_data() function will turn off the "valid" flag for anything
|
---|
2506 | it frees. If you need to turn the flag off for a chunk that was freed by
|
---|
2507 | your application instead of by libpng, you can use
|
---|
2508 |
|
---|
2509 | png_set_invalid(png_ptr, info_ptr, mask);
|
---|
2510 |
|
---|
2511 | mask - identifies the chunks to be made invalid,
|
---|
2512 | containing the bitwise OR of one or
|
---|
2513 | more of
|
---|
2514 | PNG_INFO_gAMA, PNG_INFO_sBIT,
|
---|
2515 | PNG_INFO_cHRM, PNG_INFO_PLTE,
|
---|
2516 | PNG_INFO_tRNS, PNG_INFO_bKGD,
|
---|
2517 | PNG_INFO_eXIf,
|
---|
2518 | PNG_INFO_hIST, PNG_INFO_pHYs,
|
---|
2519 | PNG_INFO_oFFs, PNG_INFO_tIME,
|
---|
2520 | PNG_INFO_pCAL, PNG_INFO_sRGB,
|
---|
2521 | PNG_INFO_iCCP, PNG_INFO_sPLT,
|
---|
2522 | PNG_INFO_sCAL, PNG_INFO_IDAT
|
---|
2523 |
|
---|
2524 | For a more compact example of reading a PNG image, see the file example.c.
|
---|
2525 |
|
---|
2526 | Reading PNG files progressively
|
---|
2527 |
|
---|
2528 | The progressive reader is slightly different from the non-progressive
|
---|
2529 | reader. Instead of calling png_read_info(), png_read_rows(), and
|
---|
2530 | png_read_end(), you make one call to png_process_data(), which calls
|
---|
2531 | callbacks when it has the info, a row, or the end of the image. You
|
---|
2532 | set up these callbacks with png_set_progressive_read_fn(). You don't
|
---|
2533 | have to worry about the input/output functions of libpng, as you are
|
---|
2534 | giving the library the data directly in png_process_data(). I will
|
---|
2535 | assume that you have read the section on reading PNG files above,
|
---|
2536 | so I will only highlight the differences (although I will show
|
---|
2537 | all of the code).
|
---|
2538 |
|
---|
2539 | png_structp png_ptr;
|
---|
2540 | png_infop info_ptr;
|
---|
2541 |
|
---|
2542 | /* An example code fragment of how you would
|
---|
2543 | initialize the progressive reader in your
|
---|
2544 | application. */
|
---|
2545 | int
|
---|
2546 | initialize_png_reader()
|
---|
2547 | {
|
---|
2548 | png_ptr = png_create_read_struct
|
---|
2549 | (PNG_LIBPNG_VER_STRING, (png_voidp)user_error_ptr,
|
---|
2550 | user_error_fn, user_warning_fn);
|
---|
2551 |
|
---|
2552 | if (!png_ptr)
|
---|
2553 | return ERROR;
|
---|
2554 |
|
---|
2555 | info_ptr = png_create_info_struct(png_ptr);
|
---|
2556 |
|
---|
2557 | if (!info_ptr)
|
---|
2558 | {
|
---|
2559 | png_destroy_read_struct(&png_ptr,
|
---|
2560 | (png_infopp)NULL, (png_infopp)NULL);
|
---|
2561 | return ERROR;
|
---|
2562 | }
|
---|
2563 |
|
---|
2564 | if (setjmp(png_jmpbuf(png_ptr)))
|
---|
2565 | {
|
---|
2566 | png_destroy_read_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr,
|
---|
2567 | (png_infopp)NULL);
|
---|
2568 | return ERROR;
|
---|
2569 | }
|
---|
2570 |
|
---|
2571 | /* This one's new. You can provide functions
|
---|
2572 | to be called when the header info is valid,
|
---|
2573 | when each row is completed, and when the image
|
---|
2574 | is finished. If you aren't using all functions,
|
---|
2575 | you can specify NULL parameters. Even when all
|
---|
2576 | three functions are NULL, you need to call
|
---|
2577 | png_set_progressive_read_fn(). You can use
|
---|
2578 | any struct as the user_ptr (cast to a void pointer
|
---|
2579 | for the function call), and retrieve the pointer
|
---|
2580 | from inside the callbacks using the function
|
---|
2581 |
|
---|
2582 | png_get_progressive_ptr(png_ptr);
|
---|
2583 |
|
---|
2584 | which will return a void pointer, which you have
|
---|
2585 | to cast appropriately.
|
---|
2586 | */
|
---|
2587 | png_set_progressive_read_fn(png_ptr, (void *)user_ptr,
|
---|
2588 | info_callback, row_callback, end_callback);
|
---|
2589 |
|
---|
2590 | return 0;
|
---|
2591 | }
|
---|
2592 |
|
---|
2593 | /* A code fragment that you call as you receive blocks
|
---|
2594 | of data */
|
---|
2595 | int
|
---|
2596 | process_data(png_bytep buffer, png_uint_32 length)
|
---|
2597 | {
|
---|
2598 | if (setjmp(png_jmpbuf(png_ptr)))
|
---|
2599 | {
|
---|
2600 | png_destroy_read_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr,
|
---|
2601 | (png_infopp)NULL);
|
---|
2602 | return ERROR;
|
---|
2603 | }
|
---|
2604 |
|
---|
2605 | /* This one's new also. Simply give it a chunk
|
---|
2606 | of data from the file stream (in order, of
|
---|
2607 | course). On machines with segmented memory
|
---|
2608 | models machines, don't give it any more than
|
---|
2609 | 64K. The library seems to run fine with sizes
|
---|
2610 | of 4K. Although you can give it much less if
|
---|
2611 | necessary (I assume you can give it chunks of
|
---|
2612 | 1 byte, I haven't tried less than 256 bytes
|
---|
2613 | yet). When this function returns, you may
|
---|
2614 | want to display any rows that were generated
|
---|
2615 | in the row callback if you don't already do
|
---|
2616 | so there.
|
---|
2617 | */
|
---|
2618 | png_process_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, buffer, length);
|
---|
2619 |
|
---|
2620 | /* At this point you can call png_process_data_skip if
|
---|
2621 | you want to handle data the library will skip yourself;
|
---|
2622 | it simply returns the number of bytes to skip (and stops
|
---|
2623 | libpng skipping that number of bytes on the next
|
---|
2624 | png_process_data call).
|
---|
2625 | return 0;
|
---|
2626 | }
|
---|
2627 |
|
---|
2628 | /* This function is called (as set by
|
---|
2629 | png_set_progressive_read_fn() above) when enough data
|
---|
2630 | has been supplied so all of the header has been
|
---|
2631 | read.
|
---|
2632 | */
|
---|
2633 | void
|
---|
2634 | info_callback(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info)
|
---|
2635 | {
|
---|
2636 | /* Do any setup here, including setting any of
|
---|
2637 | the transformations mentioned in the Reading
|
---|
2638 | PNG files section. For now, you _must_ call
|
---|
2639 | either png_start_read_image() or
|
---|
2640 | png_read_update_info() after all the
|
---|
2641 | transformations are set (even if you don't set
|
---|
2642 | any). You may start getting rows before
|
---|
2643 | png_process_data() returns, so this is your
|
---|
2644 | last chance to prepare for that.
|
---|
2645 |
|
---|
2646 | This is where you turn on interlace handling,
|
---|
2647 | assuming you don't want to do it yourself.
|
---|
2648 |
|
---|
2649 | If you need to you can stop the processing of
|
---|
2650 | your original input data at this point by calling
|
---|
2651 | png_process_data_pause. This returns the number
|
---|
2652 | of unprocessed bytes from the last png_process_data
|
---|
2653 | call - it is up to you to ensure that the next call
|
---|
2654 | sees these bytes again. If you don't want to bother
|
---|
2655 | with this you can get libpng to cache the unread
|
---|
2656 | bytes by setting the 'save' parameter (see png.h) but
|
---|
2657 | then libpng will have to copy the data internally.
|
---|
2658 | */
|
---|
2659 | }
|
---|
2660 |
|
---|
2661 | /* This function is called when each row of image
|
---|
2662 | data is complete */
|
---|
2663 | void
|
---|
2664 | row_callback(png_structp png_ptr, png_bytep new_row,
|
---|
2665 | png_uint_32 row_num, int pass)
|
---|
2666 | {
|
---|
2667 | /* If the image is interlaced, and you turned
|
---|
2668 | on the interlace handler, this function will
|
---|
2669 | be called for every row in every pass. Some
|
---|
2670 | of these rows will not be changed from the
|
---|
2671 | previous pass. When the row is not changed,
|
---|
2672 | the new_row variable will be NULL. The rows
|
---|
2673 | and passes are called in order, so you don't
|
---|
2674 | really need the row_num and pass, but I'm
|
---|
2675 | supplying them because it may make your life
|
---|
2676 | easier.
|
---|
2677 |
|
---|
2678 | If you did not turn on interlace handling then
|
---|
2679 | the callback is called for each row of each
|
---|
2680 | sub-image when the image is interlaced. In this
|
---|
2681 | case 'row_num' is the row in the sub-image, not
|
---|
2682 | the row in the output image as it is in all other
|
---|
2683 | cases.
|
---|
2684 |
|
---|
2685 | For the non-NULL rows of interlaced images when
|
---|
2686 | you have switched on libpng interlace handling,
|
---|
2687 | you must call png_progressive_combine_row()
|
---|
2688 | passing in the row and the old row. You can
|
---|
2689 | call this function for NULL rows (it will just
|
---|
2690 | return) and for non-interlaced images (it just
|
---|
2691 | does the memcpy for you) if it will make the
|
---|
2692 | code easier. Thus, you can just do this for
|
---|
2693 | all cases if you switch on interlace handling;
|
---|
2694 | */
|
---|
2695 |
|
---|
2696 | png_progressive_combine_row(png_ptr, old_row,
|
---|
2697 | new_row);
|
---|
2698 |
|
---|
2699 | /* where old_row is what was displayed
|
---|
2700 | previously for the row. Note that the first
|
---|
2701 | pass (pass == 0, really) will completely cover
|
---|
2702 | the old row, so the rows do not have to be
|
---|
2703 | initialized. After the first pass (and only
|
---|
2704 | for interlaced images), you will have to pass
|
---|
2705 | the current row, and the function will combine
|
---|
2706 | the old row and the new row.
|
---|
2707 |
|
---|
2708 | You can also call png_process_data_pause in this
|
---|
2709 | callback - see above.
|
---|
2710 | */
|
---|
2711 | }
|
---|
2712 |
|
---|
2713 | void
|
---|
2714 | end_callback(png_structp png_ptr, png_infop info)
|
---|
2715 | {
|
---|
2716 | /* This function is called after the whole image
|
---|
2717 | has been read, including any chunks after the
|
---|
2718 | image (up to and including the IEND). You
|
---|
2719 | will usually have the same info chunk as you
|
---|
2720 | had in the header, although some data may have
|
---|
2721 | been added to the comments and time fields.
|
---|
2722 |
|
---|
2723 | Most people won't do much here, perhaps setting
|
---|
2724 | a flag that marks the image as finished.
|
---|
2725 | */
|
---|
2726 | }
|
---|
2727 |
|
---|
2728 |
|
---|
2729 |
|
---|
2730 | IV. Writing
|
---|
2731 |
|
---|
2732 | Much of this is very similar to reading. However, everything of
|
---|
2733 | importance is repeated here, so you won't have to constantly look
|
---|
2734 | back up in the reading section to understand writing.
|
---|
2735 |
|
---|
2736 | Setup
|
---|
2737 |
|
---|
2738 | You will want to do the I/O initialization before you get into libpng,
|
---|
2739 | so if it doesn't work, you don't have anything to undo. If you are not
|
---|
2740 | using the standard I/O functions, you will need to replace them with
|
---|
2741 | custom writing functions. See the discussion under Customizing libpng.
|
---|
2742 |
|
---|
2743 | FILE *fp = fopen(file_name, "wb");
|
---|
2744 |
|
---|
2745 | if (!fp)
|
---|
2746 | return ERROR;
|
---|
2747 |
|
---|
2748 | Next, png_struct and png_info need to be allocated and initialized.
|
---|
2749 | As these can be both relatively large, you may not want to store these
|
---|
2750 | on the stack, unless you have stack space to spare. Of course, you
|
---|
2751 | will want to check if they return NULL. If you are also reading,
|
---|
2752 | you won't want to name your read structure and your write structure
|
---|
2753 | both "png_ptr"; you can call them anything you like, such as
|
---|
2754 | "read_ptr" and "write_ptr". Look at pngtest.c, for example.
|
---|
2755 |
|
---|
2756 | png_structp png_ptr = png_create_write_struct
|
---|
2757 | (PNG_LIBPNG_VER_STRING, (png_voidp)user_error_ptr,
|
---|
2758 | user_error_fn, user_warning_fn);
|
---|
2759 |
|
---|
2760 | if (!png_ptr)
|
---|
2761 | return ERROR;
|
---|
2762 |
|
---|
2763 | png_infop info_ptr = png_create_info_struct(png_ptr);
|
---|
2764 | if (!info_ptr)
|
---|
2765 | {
|
---|
2766 | png_destroy_write_struct(&png_ptr,
|
---|
2767 | (png_infopp)NULL);
|
---|
2768 | return ERROR;
|
---|
2769 | }
|
---|
2770 |
|
---|
2771 | If you want to use your own memory allocation routines,
|
---|
2772 | define PNG_USER_MEM_SUPPORTED and use
|
---|
2773 | png_create_write_struct_2() instead of png_create_write_struct():
|
---|
2774 |
|
---|
2775 | png_structp png_ptr = png_create_write_struct_2
|
---|
2776 | (PNG_LIBPNG_VER_STRING, (png_voidp)user_error_ptr,
|
---|
2777 | user_error_fn, user_warning_fn, (png_voidp)
|
---|
2778 | user_mem_ptr, user_malloc_fn, user_free_fn);
|
---|
2779 |
|
---|
2780 | After you have these structures, you will need to set up the
|
---|
2781 | error handling. When libpng encounters an error, it expects to
|
---|
2782 | longjmp() back to your routine. Therefore, you will need to call
|
---|
2783 | setjmp() and pass the png_jmpbuf(png_ptr). If you
|
---|
2784 | write the file from different routines, you will need to update
|
---|
2785 | the png_jmpbuf(png_ptr) every time you enter a new routine that will
|
---|
2786 | call a png_*() function. See your documentation of setjmp/longjmp
|
---|
2787 | for your compiler for more information on setjmp/longjmp. See
|
---|
2788 | the discussion on libpng error handling in the Customizing Libpng
|
---|
2789 | section below for more information on the libpng error handling.
|
---|
2790 |
|
---|
2791 | if (setjmp(png_jmpbuf(png_ptr)))
|
---|
2792 | {
|
---|
2793 | png_destroy_write_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr);
|
---|
2794 | fclose(fp);
|
---|
2795 | return ERROR;
|
---|
2796 | }
|
---|
2797 | ...
|
---|
2798 | return;
|
---|
2799 |
|
---|
2800 | If you would rather avoid the complexity of setjmp/longjmp issues,
|
---|
2801 | you can compile libpng with PNG_NO_SETJMP, in which case
|
---|
2802 | errors will result in a call to PNG_ABORT() which defaults to abort().
|
---|
2803 |
|
---|
2804 | You can #define PNG_ABORT() to a function that does something
|
---|
2805 | more useful than abort(), as long as your function does not
|
---|
2806 | return.
|
---|
2807 |
|
---|
2808 | Checking for invalid palette index on write was added at libpng
|
---|
2809 | 1.5.10. If a pixel contains an invalid (out-of-range) index libpng issues
|
---|
2810 | a benign error. This is enabled by default because this condition is an
|
---|
2811 | error according to the PNG specification, Clause 11.3.2, but the error can
|
---|
2812 | be ignored in each png_ptr with
|
---|
2813 |
|
---|
2814 | png_set_check_for_invalid_index(png_ptr, 0);
|
---|
2815 |
|
---|
2816 | If the error is ignored, or if png_benign_error() treats it as a warning,
|
---|
2817 | any invalid pixels are written as-is by the encoder, resulting in an
|
---|
2818 | invalid PNG datastream as output. In this case the application is
|
---|
2819 | responsible for ensuring that the pixel indexes are in range when it writes
|
---|
2820 | a PLTE chunk with fewer entries than the bit depth would allow.
|
---|
2821 |
|
---|
2822 | Now you need to set up the output code. The default for libpng is to
|
---|
2823 | use the C function fwrite(). If you use this, you will need to pass a
|
---|
2824 | valid FILE * in the function png_init_io(). Be sure that the file is
|
---|
2825 | opened in binary mode. Again, if you wish to handle writing data in
|
---|
2826 | another way, see the discussion on libpng I/O handling in the Customizing
|
---|
2827 | Libpng section below.
|
---|
2828 |
|
---|
2829 | png_init_io(png_ptr, fp);
|
---|
2830 |
|
---|
2831 | If you are embedding your PNG into a datastream such as MNG, and don't
|
---|
2832 | want libpng to write the 8-byte signature, or if you have already
|
---|
2833 | written the signature in your application, use
|
---|
2834 |
|
---|
2835 | png_set_sig_bytes(png_ptr, 8);
|
---|
2836 |
|
---|
2837 | to inform libpng that it should not write a signature.
|
---|
2838 |
|
---|
2839 | Write callbacks
|
---|
2840 |
|
---|
2841 | At this point, you can set up a callback function that will be
|
---|
2842 | called after each row has been written, which you can use to control
|
---|
2843 | a progress meter or the like. It's demonstrated in pngtest.c.
|
---|
2844 | You must supply a function
|
---|
2845 |
|
---|
2846 | void write_row_callback(png_structp png_ptr, png_uint_32 row,
|
---|
2847 | int pass);
|
---|
2848 | {
|
---|
2849 | /* put your code here */
|
---|
2850 | }
|
---|
2851 |
|
---|
2852 | (You can give it another name that you like instead of "write_row_callback")
|
---|
2853 |
|
---|
2854 | To inform libpng about your function, use
|
---|
2855 |
|
---|
2856 | png_set_write_status_fn(png_ptr, write_row_callback);
|
---|
2857 |
|
---|
2858 | When this function is called the row has already been completely processed and
|
---|
2859 | it has also been written out. The 'row' and 'pass' refer to the next row to be
|
---|
2860 | handled. For the
|
---|
2861 | non-interlaced case the row that was just handled is simply one less than the
|
---|
2862 | passed in row number, and pass will always be 0. For the interlaced case the
|
---|
2863 | same applies unless the row value is 0, in which case the row just handled was
|
---|
2864 | the last one from one of the preceding passes. Because interlacing may skip a
|
---|
2865 | pass you cannot be sure that the preceding pass is just 'pass-1', if you really
|
---|
2866 | need to know what the last pass is record (row,pass) from the callback and use
|
---|
2867 | the last recorded value each time.
|
---|
2868 |
|
---|
2869 | As with the user transform you can find the output row using the
|
---|
2870 | PNG_ROW_FROM_PASS_ROW macro.
|
---|
2871 |
|
---|
2872 | You now have the option of modifying how the compression library will
|
---|
2873 | run. The following functions are mainly for testing, but may be useful
|
---|
2874 | in some cases, like if you need to write PNG files extremely fast and
|
---|
2875 | are willing to give up some compression, or if you want to get the
|
---|
2876 | maximum possible compression at the expense of slower writing. If you
|
---|
2877 | have no special needs in this area, let the library do what it wants by
|
---|
2878 | not calling this function at all, as it has been tuned to deliver a good
|
---|
2879 | speed/compression ratio. The second parameter to png_set_filter() is
|
---|
2880 | the filter method, for which the only valid values are 0 (as of the
|
---|
2881 | July 1999 PNG specification, version 1.2) or 64 (if you are writing
|
---|
2882 | a PNG datastream that is to be embedded in a MNG datastream). The third
|
---|
2883 | parameter is a flag that indicates which filter type(s) are to be tested
|
---|
2884 | for each scanline. See the PNG specification for details on the specific
|
---|
2885 | filter types.
|
---|
2886 |
|
---|
2887 |
|
---|
2888 | /* turn on or off filtering, and/or choose
|
---|
2889 | specific filters. You can use either a single
|
---|
2890 | PNG_FILTER_VALUE_NAME or the bitwise OR of one
|
---|
2891 | or more PNG_FILTER_NAME masks.
|
---|
2892 | */
|
---|
2893 | png_set_filter(png_ptr, 0,
|
---|
2894 | PNG_FILTER_NONE | PNG_FILTER_VALUE_NONE |
|
---|
2895 | PNG_FILTER_SUB | PNG_FILTER_VALUE_SUB |
|
---|
2896 | PNG_FILTER_UP | PNG_FILTER_VALUE_UP |
|
---|
2897 | PNG_FILTER_AVG | PNG_FILTER_VALUE_AVG |
|
---|
2898 | PNG_FILTER_PAETH | PNG_FILTER_VALUE_PAETH|
|
---|
2899 | PNG_ALL_FILTERS | PNG_FAST_FILTERS);
|
---|
2900 |
|
---|
2901 | If an application wants to start and stop using particular filters during
|
---|
2902 | compression, it should start out with all of the filters (to ensure that
|
---|
2903 | the previous row of pixels will be stored in case it's needed later),
|
---|
2904 | and then add and remove them after the start of compression.
|
---|
2905 |
|
---|
2906 | If you are writing a PNG datastream that is to be embedded in a MNG
|
---|
2907 | datastream, the second parameter can be either 0 or 64.
|
---|
2908 |
|
---|
2909 | The png_set_compression_*() functions interface to the zlib compression
|
---|
2910 | library, and should mostly be ignored unless you really know what you are
|
---|
2911 | doing. The only generally useful call is png_set_compression_level()
|
---|
2912 | which changes how much time zlib spends on trying to compress the image
|
---|
2913 | data. See the Compression Library (zlib.h and algorithm.txt, distributed
|
---|
2914 | with zlib) for details on the compression levels.
|
---|
2915 |
|
---|
2916 | #include zlib.h
|
---|
2917 |
|
---|
2918 | /* Set the zlib compression level */
|
---|
2919 | png_set_compression_level(png_ptr,
|
---|
2920 | Z_BEST_COMPRESSION);
|
---|
2921 |
|
---|
2922 | /* Set other zlib parameters for compressing IDAT */
|
---|
2923 | png_set_compression_mem_level(png_ptr, 8);
|
---|
2924 | png_set_compression_strategy(png_ptr,
|
---|
2925 | Z_DEFAULT_STRATEGY);
|
---|
2926 | png_set_compression_window_bits(png_ptr, 15);
|
---|
2927 | png_set_compression_method(png_ptr, 8);
|
---|
2928 | png_set_compression_buffer_size(png_ptr, 8192)
|
---|
2929 |
|
---|
2930 | /* Set zlib parameters for text compression
|
---|
2931 | * If you don't call these, the parameters
|
---|
2932 | * fall back on those defined for IDAT chunks
|
---|
2933 | */
|
---|
2934 | png_set_text_compression_mem_level(png_ptr, 8);
|
---|
2935 | png_set_text_compression_strategy(png_ptr,
|
---|
2936 | Z_DEFAULT_STRATEGY);
|
---|
2937 | png_set_text_compression_window_bits(png_ptr, 15);
|
---|
2938 | png_set_text_compression_method(png_ptr, 8);
|
---|
2939 |
|
---|
2940 | Setting the contents of info for output
|
---|
2941 |
|
---|
2942 | You now need to fill in the png_info structure with all the data you
|
---|
2943 | wish to write before the actual image. Note that the only thing you
|
---|
2944 | are allowed to write after the image is the text chunks and the time
|
---|
2945 | chunk (as of PNG Specification 1.2, anyway). See png_write_end() and
|
---|
2946 | the latest PNG specification for more information on that. If you
|
---|
2947 | wish to write them before the image, fill them in now, and flag that
|
---|
2948 | data as being valid. If you want to wait until after the data, don't
|
---|
2949 | fill them until png_write_end(). For all the fields in png_info and
|
---|
2950 | their data types, see png.h. For explanations of what the fields
|
---|
2951 | contain, see the PNG specification.
|
---|
2952 |
|
---|
2953 | Some of the more important parts of the png_info are:
|
---|
2954 |
|
---|
2955 | png_set_IHDR(png_ptr, info_ptr, width, height,
|
---|
2956 | bit_depth, color_type, interlace_type,
|
---|
2957 | compression_type, filter_method)
|
---|
2958 |
|
---|
2959 | width - holds the width of the image
|
---|
2960 | in pixels (up to 2^31).
|
---|
2961 |
|
---|
2962 | height - holds the height of the image
|
---|
2963 | in pixels (up to 2^31).
|
---|
2964 |
|
---|
2965 | bit_depth - holds the bit depth of one of the
|
---|
2966 | image channels.
|
---|
2967 | (valid values are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
|
---|
2968 | and depend also on the
|
---|
2969 | color_type. See also significant
|
---|
2970 | bits (sBIT) below).
|
---|
2971 |
|
---|
2972 | color_type - describes which color/alpha
|
---|
2973 | channels are present.
|
---|
2974 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY
|
---|
2975 | (bit depths 1, 2, 4, 8, 16)
|
---|
2976 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_GRAY_ALPHA
|
---|
2977 | (bit depths 8, 16)
|
---|
2978 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_PALETTE
|
---|
2979 | (bit depths 1, 2, 4, 8)
|
---|
2980 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB
|
---|
2981 | (bit_depths 8, 16)
|
---|
2982 | PNG_COLOR_TYPE_RGB_ALPHA
|
---|
2983 | (bit_depths 8, 16)
|
---|
2984 |
|
---|
2985 | PNG_COLOR_MASK_PALETTE
|
---|
2986 | PNG_COLOR_MASK_COLOR
|
---|
2987 | PNG_COLOR_MASK_ALPHA
|
---|
2988 |
|
---|
2989 | interlace_type - PNG_INTERLACE_NONE or
|
---|
2990 | PNG_INTERLACE_ADAM7
|
---|
2991 |
|
---|
2992 | compression_type - (must be
|
---|
2993 | PNG_COMPRESSION_TYPE_DEFAULT)
|
---|
2994 |
|
---|
2995 | filter_method - (must be PNG_FILTER_TYPE_DEFAULT
|
---|
2996 | or, if you are writing a PNG to
|
---|
2997 | be embedded in a MNG datastream,
|
---|
2998 | can also be
|
---|
2999 | PNG_INTRAPIXEL_DIFFERENCING)
|
---|
3000 |
|
---|
3001 | If you call png_set_IHDR(), the call must appear before any of the
|
---|
3002 | other png_set_*() functions, because they might require access to some of
|
---|
3003 | the IHDR settings. The remaining png_set_*() functions can be called
|
---|
3004 | in any order.
|
---|
3005 |
|
---|
3006 | If you wish, you can reset the compression_type, interlace_type, or
|
---|
3007 | filter_method later by calling png_set_IHDR() again; if you do this, the
|
---|
3008 | width, height, bit_depth, and color_type must be the same in each call.
|
---|
3009 |
|
---|
3010 | png_set_PLTE(png_ptr, info_ptr, palette,
|
---|
3011 | num_palette);
|
---|
3012 |
|
---|
3013 | palette - the palette for the file
|
---|
3014 | (array of png_color)
|
---|
3015 | num_palette - number of entries in the palette
|
---|
3016 |
|
---|
3017 |
|
---|
3018 | png_set_gAMA(png_ptr, info_ptr, file_gamma);
|
---|
3019 | png_set_gAMA_fixed(png_ptr, info_ptr, int_file_gamma);
|
---|
3020 |
|
---|
3021 | file_gamma - the gamma at which the image was
|
---|
3022 | created (PNG_INFO_gAMA)
|
---|
3023 |
|
---|
3024 | int_file_gamma - 100,000 times the gamma at which
|
---|
3025 | the image was created
|
---|
3026 |
|
---|
3027 | png_set_cHRM(png_ptr, info_ptr, white_x, white_y, red_x, red_y,
|
---|
3028 | green_x, green_y, blue_x, blue_y)
|
---|
3029 | png_set_cHRM_XYZ(png_ptr, info_ptr, red_X, red_Y, red_Z, green_X,
|
---|
3030 | green_Y, green_Z, blue_X, blue_Y, blue_Z)
|
---|
3031 | png_set_cHRM_fixed(png_ptr, info_ptr, int_white_x, int_white_y,
|
---|
3032 | int_red_x, int_red_y, int_green_x, int_green_y,
|
---|
3033 | int_blue_x, int_blue_y)
|
---|
3034 | png_set_cHRM_XYZ_fixed(png_ptr, info_ptr, int_red_X, int_red_Y,
|
---|
3035 | int_red_Z, int_green_X, int_green_Y, int_green_Z,
|
---|
3036 | int_blue_X, int_blue_Y, int_blue_Z)
|
---|
3037 |
|
---|
3038 | {white,red,green,blue}_{x,y}
|
---|
3039 | A color space encoding specified using the chromaticities
|
---|
3040 | of the end points and the white point.
|
---|
3041 |
|
---|
3042 | {red,green,blue}_{X,Y,Z}
|
---|
3043 | A color space encoding specified using the encoding end
|
---|
3044 | points - the CIE tristimulus specification of the intended
|
---|
3045 | color of the red, green and blue channels in the PNG RGB
|
---|
3046 | data. The white point is simply the sum of the three end
|
---|
3047 | points.
|
---|
3048 |
|
---|
3049 | png_set_sRGB(png_ptr, info_ptr, srgb_intent);
|
---|
3050 |
|
---|
3051 | srgb_intent - the rendering intent
|
---|
3052 | (PNG_INFO_sRGB) The presence of
|
---|
3053 | the sRGB chunk means that the pixel
|
---|
3054 | data is in the sRGB color space.
|
---|
3055 | This chunk also implies specific
|
---|
3056 | values of gAMA and cHRM. Rendering
|
---|
3057 | intent is the CSS-1 property that
|
---|
3058 | has been defined by the International
|
---|
3059 | Color Consortium
|
---|
3060 | (http://www.color.org).
|
---|
3061 | It can be one of
|
---|
3062 | PNG_sRGB_INTENT_SATURATION,
|
---|
3063 | PNG_sRGB_INTENT_PERCEPTUAL,
|
---|
3064 | PNG_sRGB_INTENT_ABSOLUTE, or
|
---|
3065 | PNG_sRGB_INTENT_RELATIVE.
|
---|
3066 |
|
---|
3067 |
|
---|
3068 | png_set_sRGB_gAMA_and_cHRM(png_ptr, info_ptr,
|
---|
3069 | srgb_intent);
|
---|
3070 |
|
---|
3071 | srgb_intent - the rendering intent
|
---|
3072 | (PNG_INFO_sRGB) The presence of the
|
---|
3073 | sRGB chunk means that the pixel
|
---|
3074 | data is in the sRGB color space.
|
---|
3075 | This function also causes gAMA and
|
---|
3076 | cHRM chunks with the specific values
|
---|
3077 | that are consistent with sRGB to be
|
---|
3078 | written.
|
---|
3079 |
|
---|
3080 | png_set_iCCP(png_ptr, info_ptr, name, compression_type,
|
---|
3081 | profile, proflen);
|
---|
3082 |
|
---|
3083 | name - The profile name.
|
---|
3084 |
|
---|
3085 | compression_type - The compression type; always
|
---|
3086 | PNG_COMPRESSION_TYPE_BASE for PNG 1.0.
|
---|
3087 | You may give NULL to this argument to
|
---|
3088 | ignore it.
|
---|
3089 |
|
---|
3090 | profile - International Color Consortium color
|
---|
3091 | profile data. May contain NULs.
|
---|
3092 |
|
---|
3093 | proflen - length of profile data in bytes.
|
---|
3094 |
|
---|
3095 | png_set_sBIT(png_ptr, info_ptr, sig_bit);
|
---|
3096 |
|
---|
3097 | sig_bit - the number of significant bits for
|
---|
3098 | (PNG_INFO_sBIT) each of the gray, red,
|
---|
3099 | green, and blue channels, whichever are
|
---|
3100 | appropriate for the given color type
|
---|
3101 | (png_color_16)
|
---|
3102 |
|
---|
3103 | png_set_tRNS(png_ptr, info_ptr, trans_alpha,
|
---|
3104 | num_trans, trans_color);
|
---|
3105 |
|
---|
3106 | trans_alpha - array of alpha (transparency)
|
---|
3107 | entries for palette (PNG_INFO_tRNS)
|
---|
3108 |
|
---|
3109 | num_trans - number of transparent entries
|
---|
3110 | (PNG_INFO_tRNS)
|
---|
3111 |
|
---|
3112 | trans_color - graylevel or color sample values
|
---|
3113 | (in order red, green, blue) of the
|
---|
3114 | single transparent color for
|
---|
3115 | non-paletted images (PNG_INFO_tRNS)
|
---|
3116 |
|
---|
3117 | png_set_eXIf_1(png_ptr, info_ptr, num_exif, exif);
|
---|
3118 |
|
---|
3119 | exif - Exif profile (array of
|
---|
3120 | png_byte) (PNG_INFO_eXIf)
|
---|
3121 |
|
---|
3122 | png_set_hIST(png_ptr, info_ptr, hist);
|
---|
3123 |
|
---|
3124 | hist - histogram of palette (array of
|
---|
3125 | png_uint_16) (PNG_INFO_hIST)
|
---|
3126 |
|
---|
3127 | png_set_tIME(png_ptr, info_ptr, mod_time);
|
---|
3128 |
|
---|
3129 | mod_time - time image was last modified
|
---|
3130 | (PNG_VALID_tIME)
|
---|
3131 |
|
---|
3132 | png_set_bKGD(png_ptr, info_ptr, background);
|
---|
3133 |
|
---|
3134 | background - background color (of type
|
---|
3135 | png_color_16p) (PNG_VALID_bKGD)
|
---|
3136 |
|
---|
3137 | png_set_text(png_ptr, info_ptr, text_ptr, num_text);
|
---|
3138 |
|
---|
3139 | text_ptr - array of png_text holding image
|
---|
3140 | comments
|
---|
3141 |
|
---|
3142 | text_ptr[i].compression - type of compression used
|
---|
3143 | on "text" PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_NONE
|
---|
3144 | PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_zTXt
|
---|
3145 | PNG_ITXT_COMPRESSION_NONE
|
---|
3146 | PNG_ITXT_COMPRESSION_zTXt
|
---|
3147 | text_ptr[i].key - keyword for comment. Must contain
|
---|
3148 | 1-79 characters.
|
---|
3149 | text_ptr[i].text - text comments for current
|
---|
3150 | keyword. Can be NULL or empty.
|
---|
3151 | text_ptr[i].text_length - length of text string,
|
---|
3152 | after decompression, 0 for iTXt
|
---|
3153 | text_ptr[i].itxt_length - length of itxt string,
|
---|
3154 | after decompression, 0 for tEXt/zTXt
|
---|
3155 | text_ptr[i].lang - language of comment (NULL or
|
---|
3156 | empty for unknown).
|
---|
3157 | text_ptr[i].translated_keyword - keyword in UTF-8 (NULL
|
---|
3158 | or empty for unknown).
|
---|
3159 |
|
---|
3160 | Note that the itxt_length, lang, and lang_key
|
---|
3161 | members of the text_ptr structure only exist when the
|
---|
3162 | library is built with iTXt chunk support. Prior to
|
---|
3163 | libpng-1.4.0 the library was built by default without
|
---|
3164 | iTXt support. Also note that when iTXt is supported,
|
---|
3165 | they contain NULL pointers when the "compression"
|
---|
3166 | field contains PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_NONE or
|
---|
3167 | PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_zTXt.
|
---|
3168 |
|
---|
3169 | num_text - number of comments
|
---|
3170 |
|
---|
3171 | png_set_sPLT(png_ptr, info_ptr, &palette_ptr,
|
---|
3172 | num_spalettes);
|
---|
3173 |
|
---|
3174 | palette_ptr - array of png_sPLT_struct structures
|
---|
3175 | to be added to the list of palettes
|
---|
3176 | in the info structure.
|
---|
3177 | num_spalettes - number of palette structures to be
|
---|
3178 | added.
|
---|
3179 |
|
---|
3180 | png_set_oFFs(png_ptr, info_ptr, offset_x, offset_y,
|
---|
3181 | unit_type);
|
---|
3182 |
|
---|
3183 | offset_x - positive offset from the left
|
---|
3184 | edge of the screen
|
---|
3185 |
|
---|
3186 | offset_y - positive offset from the top
|
---|
3187 | edge of the screen
|
---|
3188 |
|
---|
3189 | unit_type - PNG_OFFSET_PIXEL, PNG_OFFSET_MICROMETER
|
---|
3190 |
|
---|
3191 | png_set_pHYs(png_ptr, info_ptr, res_x, res_y,
|
---|
3192 | unit_type);
|
---|
3193 |
|
---|
3194 | res_x - pixels/unit physical resolution
|
---|
3195 | in x direction
|
---|
3196 |
|
---|
3197 | res_y - pixels/unit physical resolution
|
---|
3198 | in y direction
|
---|
3199 |
|
---|
3200 | unit_type - PNG_RESOLUTION_UNKNOWN,
|
---|
3201 | PNG_RESOLUTION_METER
|
---|
3202 |
|
---|
3203 | png_set_sCAL(png_ptr, info_ptr, unit, width, height)
|
---|
3204 |
|
---|
3205 | unit - physical scale units (an integer)
|
---|
3206 |
|
---|
3207 | width - width of a pixel in physical scale units
|
---|
3208 |
|
---|
3209 | height - height of a pixel in physical scale units
|
---|
3210 | (width and height are doubles)
|
---|
3211 |
|
---|
3212 | png_set_sCAL_s(png_ptr, info_ptr, unit, width, height)
|
---|
3213 |
|
---|
3214 | unit - physical scale units (an integer)
|
---|
3215 |
|
---|
3216 | width - width of a pixel in physical scale units
|
---|
3217 | expressed as a string
|
---|
3218 |
|
---|
3219 | height - height of a pixel in physical scale units
|
---|
3220 | (width and height are strings like "2.54")
|
---|
3221 |
|
---|
3222 | png_set_unknown_chunks(png_ptr, info_ptr, &unknowns,
|
---|
3223 | num_unknowns)
|
---|
3224 |
|
---|
3225 | unknowns - array of png_unknown_chunk
|
---|
3226 | structures holding unknown chunks
|
---|
3227 | unknowns[i].name - name of unknown chunk
|
---|
3228 | unknowns[i].data - data of unknown chunk
|
---|
3229 | unknowns[i].size - size of unknown chunk's data
|
---|
3230 | unknowns[i].location - position to write chunk in file
|
---|
3231 | 0: do not write chunk
|
---|
3232 | PNG_HAVE_IHDR: before PLTE
|
---|
3233 | PNG_HAVE_PLTE: before IDAT
|
---|
3234 | PNG_AFTER_IDAT: after IDAT
|
---|
3235 |
|
---|
3236 | The "location" member is set automatically according to
|
---|
3237 | what part of the output file has already been written.
|
---|
3238 | You can change its value after calling png_set_unknown_chunks()
|
---|
3239 | as demonstrated in pngtest.c. Within each of the "locations",
|
---|
3240 | the chunks are sequenced according to their position in the
|
---|
3241 | structure (that is, the value of "i", which is the order in which
|
---|
3242 | the chunk was either read from the input file or defined with
|
---|
3243 | png_set_unknown_chunks).
|
---|
3244 |
|
---|
3245 | A quick word about text and num_text. text is an array of png_text
|
---|
3246 | structures. num_text is the number of valid structures in the array.
|
---|
3247 | Each png_text structure holds a language code, a keyword, a text value,
|
---|
3248 | and a compression type.
|
---|
3249 |
|
---|
3250 | The compression types have the same valid numbers as the compression
|
---|
3251 | types of the image data. Currently, the only valid number is zero.
|
---|
3252 | However, you can store text either compressed or uncompressed, unlike
|
---|
3253 | images, which always have to be compressed. So if you don't want the
|
---|
3254 | text compressed, set the compression type to PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_NONE.
|
---|
3255 | Because tEXt and zTXt chunks don't have a language field, if you
|
---|
3256 | specify PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_NONE or PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_zTXt
|
---|
3257 | any language code or translated keyword will not be written out.
|
---|
3258 |
|
---|
3259 | Until text gets around a few hundred bytes, it is not worth compressing it.
|
---|
3260 | After the text has been written out to the file, the compression type
|
---|
3261 | is set to PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_NONE_WR or PNG_TEXT_COMPRESSION_zTXt_WR,
|
---|
3262 | so that it isn't written out again at the end (in case you are calling
|
---|
3263 | png_write_end() with the same struct).
|
---|
3264 |
|
---|
3265 | The keywords that are given in the PNG Specification are:
|
---|
3266 |
|
---|
3267 | Title Short (one line) title or
|
---|
3268 | caption for image
|
---|
3269 |
|
---|
3270 | Author Name of image's creator
|
---|
3271 |
|
---|
3272 | Description Description of image (possibly long)
|
---|
3273 |
|
---|
3274 | Copyright Copyright notice
|
---|
3275 |
|
---|
3276 | Creation Time Time of original image creation
|
---|
3277 | (usually RFC 1123 format, see below)
|
---|
3278 |
|
---|
3279 | Software Software used to create the image
|
---|
3280 |
|
---|
3281 | Disclaimer Legal disclaimer
|
---|
3282 |
|
---|
3283 | Warning Warning of nature of content
|
---|
3284 |
|
---|
3285 | Source Device used to create the image
|
---|
3286 |
|
---|
3287 | Comment Miscellaneous comment; conversion
|
---|
3288 | from other image format
|
---|
3289 |
|
---|
3290 | The keyword-text pairs work like this. Keywords should be short
|
---|
3291 | simple descriptions of what the comment is about. Some typical
|
---|
3292 | keywords are found in the PNG specification, as is some recommendations
|
---|
3293 | on keywords. You can repeat keywords in a file. You can even write
|
---|
3294 | some text before the image and some after. For example, you may want
|
---|
3295 | to put a description of the image before the image, but leave the
|
---|
3296 | disclaimer until after, so viewers working over modem connections
|
---|
3297 | don't have to wait for the disclaimer to go over the modem before
|
---|
3298 | they start seeing the image. Finally, keywords should be full
|
---|
3299 | words, not abbreviations. Keywords and text are in the ISO 8859-1
|
---|
3300 | (Latin-1) character set (a superset of regular ASCII) and can not
|
---|
3301 | contain NUL characters, and should not contain control or other
|
---|
3302 | unprintable characters. To make the comments widely readable, stick
|
---|
3303 | with basic ASCII, and avoid machine specific character set extensions
|
---|
3304 | like the IBM-PC character set. The keyword must be present, but
|
---|
3305 | you can leave off the text string on non-compressed pairs.
|
---|
3306 | Compressed pairs must have a text string, as only the text string
|
---|
3307 | is compressed anyway, so the compression would be meaningless.
|
---|
3308 |
|
---|
3309 | PNG supports modification time via the png_time structure. Two
|
---|
3310 | conversion routines are provided, png_convert_from_time_t() for
|
---|
3311 | time_t and png_convert_from_struct_tm() for struct tm. The
|
---|
3312 | time_t routine uses gmtime(). You don't have to use either of
|
---|
3313 | these, but if you wish to fill in the png_time structure directly,
|
---|
3314 | you should provide the time in universal time (GMT) if possible
|
---|
3315 | instead of your local time. Note that the year number is the full
|
---|
3316 | year (e.g. 1998, rather than 98 - PNG is year 2000 compliant!), and
|
---|
3317 | that months start with 1.
|
---|
3318 |
|
---|
3319 | If you want to store the time of the original image creation, you should
|
---|
3320 | use a plain tEXt chunk with the "Creation Time" keyword. This is
|
---|
3321 | necessary because the "creation time" of a PNG image is somewhat vague,
|
---|
3322 | depending on whether you mean the PNG file, the time the image was
|
---|
3323 | created in a non-PNG format, a still photo from which the image was
|
---|
3324 | scanned, or possibly the subject matter itself. In order to facilitate
|
---|
3325 | machine-readable dates, it is recommended that the "Creation Time"
|
---|
3326 | tEXt chunk use RFC 1123 format dates (e.g. "22 May 1997 18:07:10 GMT"),
|
---|
3327 | although this isn't a requirement. Unlike the tIME chunk, the
|
---|
3328 | "Creation Time" tEXt chunk is not expected to be automatically changed
|
---|
3329 | by the software. To facilitate the use of RFC 1123 dates, a function
|
---|
3330 | png_convert_to_rfc1123_buffer(buffer, png_timep) is provided to
|
---|
3331 | convert from PNG time to an RFC 1123 format string. The caller must provide
|
---|
3332 | a writeable buffer of at least 29 bytes.
|
---|
3333 |
|
---|
3334 | Writing unknown chunks
|
---|
3335 |
|
---|
3336 | You can use the png_set_unknown_chunks function to queue up private chunks
|
---|
3337 | for writing. You give it a chunk name, location, raw data, and a size. You
|
---|
3338 | also must use png_set_keep_unknown_chunks() to ensure that libpng will
|
---|
3339 | handle them. That's all there is to it. The chunks will be written by the
|
---|
3340 | next following png_write_info_before_PLTE, png_write_info, or png_write_end
|
---|
3341 | function, depending upon the specified location. Any chunks previously
|
---|
3342 | read into the info structure's unknown-chunk list will also be written out
|
---|
3343 | in a sequence that satisfies the PNG specification's ordering rules.
|
---|
3344 |
|
---|
3345 | Here is an example of writing two private chunks, prVt and miNE:
|
---|
3346 |
|
---|
3347 | #ifdef PNG_WRITE_UNKNOWN_CHUNKS_SUPPORTED
|
---|
3348 | /* Set unknown chunk data */
|
---|
3349 | png_unknown_chunk unk_chunk[2];
|
---|
3350 | strcpy((char *) unk_chunk[0].name, "prVt";
|
---|
3351 | unk_chunk[0].data = (unsigned char *) "PRIVATE DATA";
|
---|
3352 | unk_chunk[0].size = strlen(unk_chunk[0].data)+1;
|
---|
3353 | unk_chunk[0].location = PNG_HAVE_IHDR;
|
---|
3354 | strcpy((char *) unk_chunk[1].name, "miNE";
|
---|
3355 | unk_chunk[1].data = (unsigned char *) "MY CHUNK DATA";
|
---|
3356 | unk_chunk[1].size = strlen(unk_chunk[0].data)+1;
|
---|
3357 | unk_chunk[1].location = PNG_AFTER_IDAT;
|
---|
3358 | png_set_unknown_chunks(write_ptr, write_info_ptr,
|
---|
3359 | unk_chunk, 2);
|
---|
3360 | /* Needed because miNE is not safe-to-copy */
|
---|
3361 | png_set_keep_unknown_chunks(png, PNG_HANDLE_CHUNK_ALWAYS,
|
---|
3362 | (png_bytep) "miNE", 1);
|
---|
3363 | # if PNG_LIBPNG_VER < 10600
|
---|
3364 | /* Deal with unknown chunk location bug in 1.5.x and earlier */
|
---|
3365 | png_set_unknown_chunk_location(png, info, 0, PNG_HAVE_IHDR);
|
---|
3366 | png_set_unknown_chunk_location(png, info, 1, PNG_AFTER_IDAT);
|
---|
3367 | # endif
|
---|
3368 | # if PNG_LIBPNG_VER < 10500
|
---|
3369 | /* PNG_AFTER_IDAT writes two copies of the chunk prior to libpng-1.5.0,
|
---|
3370 | * one before IDAT and another after IDAT, so don't use it; only use
|
---|
3371 | * PNG_HAVE_IHDR location. This call resets the location previously
|
---|
3372 | * set by assignment and png_set_unknown_chunk_location() for chunk 1.
|
---|
3373 | */
|
---|
3374 | png_set_unknown_chunk_location(png, info, 1, PNG_HAVE_IHDR);
|
---|
3375 | # endif
|
---|
3376 | #endif
|
---|
3377 |
|
---|
3378 | The high-level write interface
|
---|
3379 |
|
---|
3380 | At this point there are two ways to proceed; through the high-level
|
---|
3381 | write interface, or through a sequence of low-level write operations.
|
---|
3382 | You can use the high-level interface if your image data is present
|
---|
3383 | in the info structure. All defined output
|
---|
3384 | transformations are permitted, enabled by the following masks.
|
---|
3385 |
|
---|
3386 | PNG_TRANSFORM_IDENTITY No transformation
|
---|
3387 | PNG_TRANSFORM_PACKING Pack 1, 2 and 4-bit samples
|
---|
3388 | PNG_TRANSFORM_PACKSWAP Change order of packed
|
---|
3389 | pixels to LSB first
|
---|
3390 | PNG_TRANSFORM_INVERT_MONO Invert monochrome images
|
---|
3391 | PNG_TRANSFORM_SHIFT Normalize pixels to the
|
---|
3392 | sBIT depth
|
---|
3393 | PNG_TRANSFORM_BGR Flip RGB to BGR, RGBA
|
---|
3394 | to BGRA
|
---|
3395 | PNG_TRANSFORM_SWAP_ALPHA Flip RGBA to ARGB or GA
|
---|
3396 | to AG
|
---|
3397 | PNG_TRANSFORM_INVERT_ALPHA Change alpha from opacity
|
---|
3398 | to transparency
|
---|
3399 | PNG_TRANSFORM_SWAP_ENDIAN Byte-swap 16-bit samples
|
---|
3400 | PNG_TRANSFORM_STRIP_FILLER Strip out filler
|
---|
3401 | bytes (deprecated).
|
---|
3402 | PNG_TRANSFORM_STRIP_FILLER_BEFORE Strip out leading
|
---|
3403 | filler bytes
|
---|
3404 | PNG_TRANSFORM_STRIP_FILLER_AFTER Strip out trailing
|
---|
3405 | filler bytes
|
---|
3406 |
|
---|
3407 | If you have valid image data in the info structure (you can use
|
---|
3408 | png_set_rows() to put image data in the info structure), simply do this:
|
---|
3409 |
|
---|
3410 | png_write_png(png_ptr, info_ptr, png_transforms, NULL)
|
---|
3411 |
|
---|
3412 | where png_transforms is an integer containing the bitwise OR of some set of
|
---|
3413 | transformation flags. This call is equivalent to png_write_info(),
|
---|
3414 | followed the set of transformations indicated by the transform mask,
|
---|
3415 | then png_write_image(), and finally png_write_end().
|
---|
3416 |
|
---|
3417 | (The final parameter of this call is not yet used. Someday it might point
|
---|
3418 | to transformation parameters required by some future output transform.)
|
---|
3419 |
|
---|
3420 | You must use png_transforms and not call any png_set_transform() functions
|
---|
3421 | when you use png_write_png().
|
---|
3422 |
|
---|
3423 | The low-level write interface
|
---|
3424 |
|
---|
3425 | If you are going the low-level route instead, you are now ready to
|
---|
3426 | write all the file information up to the actual image data. You do
|
---|
3427 | this with a call to png_write_info().
|
---|
3428 |
|
---|
3429 | png_write_info(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
3430 |
|
---|
3431 | Note that there is one transformation you may need to do before
|
---|
3432 | png_write_info(). In PNG files, the alpha channel in an image is the
|
---|
3433 | level of opacity. If your data is supplied as a level of transparency,
|
---|
3434 | you can invert the alpha channel before you write it, so that 0 is
|
---|
3435 | fully transparent and 255 (in 8-bit or paletted images) or 65535
|
---|
3436 | (in 16-bit images) is fully opaque, with
|
---|
3437 |
|
---|
3438 | png_set_invert_alpha(png_ptr);
|
---|
3439 |
|
---|
3440 | This must appear before png_write_info() instead of later with the
|
---|
3441 | other transformations because in the case of paletted images the tRNS
|
---|
3442 | chunk data has to be inverted before the tRNS chunk is written. If
|
---|
3443 | your image is not a paletted image, the tRNS data (which in such cases
|
---|
3444 | represents a single color to be rendered as transparent) won't need to
|
---|
3445 | be changed, and you can safely do this transformation after your
|
---|
3446 | png_write_info() call.
|
---|
3447 |
|
---|
3448 | If you need to write a private chunk that you want to appear before
|
---|
3449 | the PLTE chunk when PLTE is present, you can write the PNG info in
|
---|
3450 | two steps, and insert code to write your own chunk between them:
|
---|
3451 |
|
---|
3452 | png_write_info_before_PLTE(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
3453 | png_set_unknown_chunks(png_ptr, info_ptr, ...);
|
---|
3454 | png_write_info(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
3455 |
|
---|
3456 | After you've written the file information, you can set up the library
|
---|
3457 | to handle any special transformations of the image data. The various
|
---|
3458 | ways to transform the data will be described in the order that they
|
---|
3459 | should occur. This is important, as some of these change the color
|
---|
3460 | type and/or bit depth of the data, and some others only work on
|
---|
3461 | certain color types and bit depths. Even though each transformation
|
---|
3462 | checks to see if it has data that it can do something with, you should
|
---|
3463 | make sure to only enable a transformation if it will be valid for the
|
---|
3464 | data. For example, don't swap red and blue on grayscale data.
|
---|
3465 |
|
---|
3466 | PNG files store RGB pixels packed into 3 or 6 bytes. This code tells
|
---|
3467 | the library to strip input data that has 4 or 8 bytes per pixel down
|
---|
3468 | to 3 or 6 bytes (or strip 2 or 4-byte grayscale+filler data to 1 or 2
|
---|
3469 | bytes per pixel).
|
---|
3470 |
|
---|
3471 | png_set_filler(png_ptr, 0, PNG_FILLER_BEFORE);
|
---|
3472 |
|
---|
3473 | where the 0 is unused, and the location is either PNG_FILLER_BEFORE or
|
---|
3474 | PNG_FILLER_AFTER, depending upon whether the filler byte in the pixel
|
---|
3475 | is stored XRGB or RGBX.
|
---|
3476 |
|
---|
3477 | PNG files pack pixels of bit depths 1, 2, and 4 into bytes as small as
|
---|
3478 | they can, resulting in, for example, 8 pixels per byte for 1 bit files.
|
---|
3479 | If the data is supplied at 1 pixel per byte, use this code, which will
|
---|
3480 | correctly pack the pixels into a single byte:
|
---|
3481 |
|
---|
3482 | png_set_packing(png_ptr);
|
---|
3483 |
|
---|
3484 | PNG files reduce possible bit depths to 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16. If your
|
---|
3485 | data is of another bit depth, you can write an sBIT chunk into the
|
---|
3486 | file so that decoders can recover the original data if desired.
|
---|
3487 |
|
---|
3488 | /* Set the true bit depth of the image data */
|
---|
3489 | if (color_type & PNG_COLOR_MASK_COLOR)
|
---|
3490 | {
|
---|
3491 | sig_bit.red = true_bit_depth;
|
---|
3492 | sig_bit.green = true_bit_depth;
|
---|
3493 | sig_bit.blue = true_bit_depth;
|
---|
3494 | }
|
---|
3495 |
|
---|
3496 | else
|
---|
3497 | {
|
---|
3498 | sig_bit.gray = true_bit_depth;
|
---|
3499 | }
|
---|
3500 |
|
---|
3501 | if (color_type & PNG_COLOR_MASK_ALPHA)
|
---|
3502 | {
|
---|
3503 | sig_bit.alpha = true_bit_depth;
|
---|
3504 | }
|
---|
3505 |
|
---|
3506 | png_set_sBIT(png_ptr, info_ptr, &sig_bit);
|
---|
3507 |
|
---|
3508 | If the data is stored in the row buffer in a bit depth other than
|
---|
3509 | one supported by PNG (e.g. 3 bit data in the range 0-7 for a 4-bit PNG),
|
---|
3510 | this will scale the values to appear to be the correct bit depth as
|
---|
3511 | is required by PNG.
|
---|
3512 |
|
---|
3513 | png_set_shift(png_ptr, &sig_bit);
|
---|
3514 |
|
---|
3515 | PNG files store 16-bit pixels in network byte order (big-endian,
|
---|
3516 | ie. most significant bits first). This code would be used if they are
|
---|
3517 | supplied the other way (little-endian, i.e. least significant bits
|
---|
3518 | first, the way PCs store them):
|
---|
3519 |
|
---|
3520 | if (bit_depth > 8)
|
---|
3521 | png_set_swap(png_ptr);
|
---|
3522 |
|
---|
3523 | If you are using packed-pixel images (1, 2, or 4 bits/pixel), and you
|
---|
3524 | need to change the order the pixels are packed into bytes, you can use:
|
---|
3525 |
|
---|
3526 | if (bit_depth < 8)
|
---|
3527 | png_set_packswap(png_ptr);
|
---|
3528 |
|
---|
3529 | PNG files store 3 color pixels in red, green, blue order. This code
|
---|
3530 | would be used if they are supplied as blue, green, red:
|
---|
3531 |
|
---|
3532 | png_set_bgr(png_ptr);
|
---|
3533 |
|
---|
3534 | PNG files describe monochrome as black being zero and white being
|
---|
3535 | one. This code would be used if the pixels are supplied with this reversed
|
---|
3536 | (black being one and white being zero):
|
---|
3537 |
|
---|
3538 | png_set_invert_mono(png_ptr);
|
---|
3539 |
|
---|
3540 | Finally, you can write your own transformation function if none of
|
---|
3541 | the existing ones meets your needs. This is done by setting a callback
|
---|
3542 | with
|
---|
3543 |
|
---|
3544 | png_set_write_user_transform_fn(png_ptr,
|
---|
3545 | write_transform_fn);
|
---|
3546 |
|
---|
3547 | You must supply the function
|
---|
3548 |
|
---|
3549 | void write_transform_fn(png_structp png_ptr, png_row_infop
|
---|
3550 | row_info, png_bytep data)
|
---|
3551 |
|
---|
3552 | See pngtest.c for a working example. Your function will be called
|
---|
3553 | before any of the other transformations are processed. If supported
|
---|
3554 | libpng also supplies an information routine that may be called from
|
---|
3555 | your callback:
|
---|
3556 |
|
---|
3557 | png_get_current_row_number(png_ptr);
|
---|
3558 | png_get_current_pass_number(png_ptr);
|
---|
3559 |
|
---|
3560 | This returns the current row passed to the transform. With interlaced
|
---|
3561 | images the value returned is the row in the input sub-image image. Use
|
---|
3562 | PNG_ROW_FROM_PASS_ROW(row, pass) and PNG_COL_FROM_PASS_COL(col, pass) to
|
---|
3563 | find the output pixel (x,y) given an interlaced sub-image pixel (row,col,pass).
|
---|
3564 |
|
---|
3565 | The discussion of interlace handling above contains more information on how to
|
---|
3566 | use these values.
|
---|
3567 |
|
---|
3568 | You can also set up a pointer to a user structure for use by your
|
---|
3569 | callback function.
|
---|
3570 |
|
---|
3571 | png_set_user_transform_info(png_ptr, user_ptr, 0, 0);
|
---|
3572 |
|
---|
3573 | The user_channels and user_depth parameters of this function are ignored
|
---|
3574 | when writing; you can set them to zero as shown.
|
---|
3575 |
|
---|
3576 | You can retrieve the pointer via the function png_get_user_transform_ptr().
|
---|
3577 | For example:
|
---|
3578 |
|
---|
3579 | voidp write_user_transform_ptr =
|
---|
3580 | png_get_user_transform_ptr(png_ptr);
|
---|
3581 |
|
---|
3582 | It is possible to have libpng flush any pending output, either manually,
|
---|
3583 | or automatically after a certain number of lines have been written. To
|
---|
3584 | flush the output stream a single time call:
|
---|
3585 |
|
---|
3586 | png_write_flush(png_ptr);
|
---|
3587 |
|
---|
3588 | and to have libpng flush the output stream periodically after a certain
|
---|
3589 | number of scanlines have been written, call:
|
---|
3590 |
|
---|
3591 | png_set_flush(png_ptr, nrows);
|
---|
3592 |
|
---|
3593 | Note that the distance between rows is from the last time png_write_flush()
|
---|
3594 | was called, or the first row of the image if it has never been called.
|
---|
3595 | So if you write 50 lines, and then png_set_flush 25, it will flush the
|
---|
3596 | output on the next scanline, and every 25 lines thereafter, unless
|
---|
3597 | png_write_flush() is called before 25 more lines have been written.
|
---|
3598 | If nrows is too small (less than about 10 lines for a 640 pixel wide
|
---|
3599 | RGB image) the image compression may decrease noticeably (although this
|
---|
3600 | may be acceptable for real-time applications). Infrequent flushing will
|
---|
3601 | only degrade the compression performance by a few percent over images
|
---|
3602 | that do not use flushing.
|
---|
3603 |
|
---|
3604 | Writing the image data
|
---|
3605 |
|
---|
3606 | That's it for the transformations. Now you can write the image data.
|
---|
3607 | The simplest way to do this is in one function call. If you have the
|
---|
3608 | whole image in memory, you can just call png_write_image() and libpng
|
---|
3609 | will write the image. You will need to pass in an array of pointers to
|
---|
3610 | each row. This function automatically handles interlacing, so you don't
|
---|
3611 | need to call png_set_interlace_handling() or call this function multiple
|
---|
3612 | times, or any of that other stuff necessary with png_write_rows().
|
---|
3613 |
|
---|
3614 | png_write_image(png_ptr, row_pointers);
|
---|
3615 |
|
---|
3616 | where row_pointers is:
|
---|
3617 |
|
---|
3618 | png_byte *row_pointers[height];
|
---|
3619 |
|
---|
3620 | You can point to void or char or whatever you use for pixels.
|
---|
3621 |
|
---|
3622 | If you don't want to write the whole image at once, you can
|
---|
3623 | use png_write_rows() instead. If the file is not interlaced,
|
---|
3624 | this is simple:
|
---|
3625 |
|
---|
3626 | png_write_rows(png_ptr, row_pointers,
|
---|
3627 | number_of_rows);
|
---|
3628 |
|
---|
3629 | row_pointers is the same as in the png_write_image() call.
|
---|
3630 |
|
---|
3631 | If you are just writing one row at a time, you can do this with
|
---|
3632 | a single row_pointer instead of an array of row_pointers:
|
---|
3633 |
|
---|
3634 | png_bytep row_pointer = row;
|
---|
3635 |
|
---|
3636 | png_write_row(png_ptr, row_pointer);
|
---|
3637 |
|
---|
3638 | When the file is interlaced, things can get a good deal more complicated.
|
---|
3639 | The only currently (as of the PNG Specification version 1.2, dated July
|
---|
3640 | 1999) defined interlacing scheme for PNG files is the "Adam7" interlace
|
---|
3641 | scheme, that breaks down an image into seven smaller images of varying
|
---|
3642 | size. libpng will build these images for you, or you can do them
|
---|
3643 | yourself. If you want to build them yourself, see the PNG specification
|
---|
3644 | for details of which pixels to write when.
|
---|
3645 |
|
---|
3646 | If you don't want libpng to handle the interlacing details, just
|
---|
3647 | use png_set_interlace_handling() and call png_write_rows() the
|
---|
3648 | correct number of times to write all the sub-images
|
---|
3649 | (png_set_interlace_handling() returns the number of sub-images.)
|
---|
3650 |
|
---|
3651 | If you want libpng to build the sub-images, call this before you start
|
---|
3652 | writing any rows:
|
---|
3653 |
|
---|
3654 | number_of_passes = png_set_interlace_handling(png_ptr);
|
---|
3655 |
|
---|
3656 | This will return the number of passes needed. Currently, this is seven,
|
---|
3657 | but may change if another interlace type is added.
|
---|
3658 |
|
---|
3659 | Then write the complete image number_of_passes times.
|
---|
3660 |
|
---|
3661 | png_write_rows(png_ptr, row_pointers, number_of_rows);
|
---|
3662 |
|
---|
3663 | Think carefully before you write an interlaced image. Typically code that
|
---|
3664 | reads such images reads all the image data into memory, uncompressed, before
|
---|
3665 | doing any processing. Only code that can display an image on the fly can
|
---|
3666 | take advantage of the interlacing and even then the image has to be exactly
|
---|
3667 | the correct size for the output device, because scaling an image requires
|
---|
3668 | adjacent pixels and these are not available until all the passes have been
|
---|
3669 | read.
|
---|
3670 |
|
---|
3671 | If you do write an interlaced image you will hardly ever need to handle
|
---|
3672 | the interlacing yourself. Call png_set_interlace_handling() and use the
|
---|
3673 | approach described above.
|
---|
3674 |
|
---|
3675 | The only time it is conceivable that you will really need to write an
|
---|
3676 | interlaced image pass-by-pass is when you have read one pass by pass and
|
---|
3677 | made some pixel-by-pixel transformation to it, as described in the read
|
---|
3678 | code above. In this case use the PNG_PASS_ROWS and PNG_PASS_COLS macros
|
---|
3679 | to determine the size of each sub-image in turn and simply write the rows
|
---|
3680 | you obtained from the read code.
|
---|
3681 |
|
---|
3682 | Finishing a sequential write
|
---|
3683 |
|
---|
3684 | After you are finished writing the image, you should finish writing
|
---|
3685 | the file. If you are interested in writing comments or time, you should
|
---|
3686 | pass an appropriately filled png_info pointer. If you are not interested,
|
---|
3687 | you can pass NULL.
|
---|
3688 |
|
---|
3689 | png_write_end(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
3690 |
|
---|
3691 | When you are done, you can free all memory used by libpng like this:
|
---|
3692 |
|
---|
3693 | png_destroy_write_struct(&png_ptr, &info_ptr);
|
---|
3694 |
|
---|
3695 | It is also possible to individually free the info_ptr members that
|
---|
3696 | point to libpng-allocated storage with the following function:
|
---|
3697 |
|
---|
3698 | png_free_data(png_ptr, info_ptr, mask, seq)
|
---|
3699 |
|
---|
3700 | mask - identifies data to be freed, a mask
|
---|
3701 | containing the bitwise OR of one or
|
---|
3702 | more of
|
---|
3703 | PNG_FREE_PLTE, PNG_FREE_TRNS,
|
---|
3704 | PNG_FREE_HIST, PNG_FREE_ICCP,
|
---|
3705 | PNG_FREE_PCAL, PNG_FREE_ROWS,
|
---|
3706 | PNG_FREE_SCAL, PNG_FREE_SPLT,
|
---|
3707 | PNG_FREE_TEXT, PNG_FREE_UNKN,
|
---|
3708 | or simply PNG_FREE_ALL
|
---|
3709 |
|
---|
3710 | seq - sequence number of item to be freed
|
---|
3711 | (-1 for all items)
|
---|
3712 |
|
---|
3713 | This function may be safely called when the relevant storage has
|
---|
3714 | already been freed, or has not yet been allocated, or was allocated
|
---|
3715 | by the user and not by libpng, and will in those cases do nothing.
|
---|
3716 | The "seq" parameter is ignored if only one item of the selected data
|
---|
3717 | type, such as PLTE, is allowed. If "seq" is not -1, and multiple items
|
---|
3718 | are allowed for the data type identified in the mask, such as text or
|
---|
3719 | sPLT, only the n'th item in the structure is freed, where n is "seq".
|
---|
3720 |
|
---|
3721 | If you allocated data such as a palette that you passed in to libpng
|
---|
3722 | with png_set_*, you must not free it until just before the call to
|
---|
3723 | png_destroy_write_struct().
|
---|
3724 |
|
---|
3725 | The default behavior is only to free data that was allocated internally
|
---|
3726 | by libpng. This can be changed, so that libpng will not free the data,
|
---|
3727 | or so that it will free data that was allocated by the user with png_malloc()
|
---|
3728 | or png_calloc() and passed in via a png_set_*() function, with
|
---|
3729 |
|
---|
3730 | png_data_freer(png_ptr, info_ptr, freer, mask)
|
---|
3731 |
|
---|
3732 | freer - one of
|
---|
3733 | PNG_DESTROY_WILL_FREE_DATA
|
---|
3734 | PNG_SET_WILL_FREE_DATA
|
---|
3735 | PNG_USER_WILL_FREE_DATA
|
---|
3736 |
|
---|
3737 | mask - which data elements are affected
|
---|
3738 | same choices as in png_free_data()
|
---|
3739 |
|
---|
3740 | For example, to transfer responsibility for some data from a read structure
|
---|
3741 | to a write structure, you could use
|
---|
3742 |
|
---|
3743 | png_data_freer(read_ptr, read_info_ptr,
|
---|
3744 | PNG_USER_WILL_FREE_DATA,
|
---|
3745 | PNG_FREE_PLTE|PNG_FREE_tRNS|PNG_FREE_hIST)
|
---|
3746 |
|
---|
3747 | png_data_freer(write_ptr, write_info_ptr,
|
---|
3748 | PNG_DESTROY_WILL_FREE_DATA,
|
---|
3749 | PNG_FREE_PLTE|PNG_FREE_tRNS|PNG_FREE_hIST)
|
---|
3750 |
|
---|
3751 | thereby briefly reassigning responsibility for freeing to the user but
|
---|
3752 | immediately afterwards reassigning it once more to the write_destroy
|
---|
3753 | function. Having done this, it would then be safe to destroy the read
|
---|
3754 | structure and continue to use the PLTE, tRNS, and hIST data in the write
|
---|
3755 | structure.
|
---|
3756 |
|
---|
3757 | This function only affects data that has already been allocated.
|
---|
3758 | You can call this function before calling after the png_set_*() functions
|
---|
3759 | to control whether the user or png_destroy_*() is supposed to free the data.
|
---|
3760 | When the user assumes responsibility for libpng-allocated data, the
|
---|
3761 | application must use
|
---|
3762 | png_free() to free it, and when the user transfers responsibility to libpng
|
---|
3763 | for data that the user has allocated, the user must have used png_malloc()
|
---|
3764 | or png_calloc() to allocate it.
|
---|
3765 |
|
---|
3766 | If you allocated text_ptr.text, text_ptr.lang, and text_ptr.translated_keyword
|
---|
3767 | separately, do not transfer responsibility for freeing text_ptr to libpng,
|
---|
3768 | because when libpng fills a png_text structure it combines these members with
|
---|
3769 | the key member, and png_free_data() will free only text_ptr.key. Similarly,
|
---|
3770 | if you transfer responsibility for free'ing text_ptr from libpng to your
|
---|
3771 | application, your application must not separately free those members.
|
---|
3772 | For a more compact example of writing a PNG image, see the file example.c.
|
---|
3773 |
|
---|
3774 | V. Simplified API
|
---|
3775 |
|
---|
3776 | The simplified API, which became available in libpng-1.6.0, hides the details
|
---|
3777 | of both libpng and the PNG file format itself.
|
---|
3778 | It allows PNG files to be read into a very limited number of
|
---|
3779 | in-memory bitmap formats or to be written from the same formats. If these
|
---|
3780 | formats do not accommodate your needs then you can, and should, use the more
|
---|
3781 | sophisticated APIs above - these support a wide variety of in-memory formats
|
---|
3782 | and a wide variety of sophisticated transformations to those formats as well
|
---|
3783 | as a wide variety of APIs to manipulate ancillary information.
|
---|
3784 |
|
---|
3785 | To read a PNG file using the simplified API:
|
---|
3786 |
|
---|
3787 | 1) Declare a 'png_image' structure (see below) on the stack, set the
|
---|
3788 | version field to PNG_IMAGE_VERSION and the 'opaque' pointer to NULL
|
---|
3789 | (this is REQUIRED, your program may crash if you don't do it.)
|
---|
3790 |
|
---|
3791 | 2) Call the appropriate png_image_begin_read... function.
|
---|
3792 |
|
---|
3793 | 3) Set the png_image 'format' member to the required sample format.
|
---|
3794 |
|
---|
3795 | 4) Allocate a buffer for the image and, if required, the color-map.
|
---|
3796 |
|
---|
3797 | 5) Call png_image_finish_read to read the image and, if required, the
|
---|
3798 | color-map into your buffers.
|
---|
3799 |
|
---|
3800 | There are no restrictions on the format of the PNG input itself; all valid
|
---|
3801 | color types, bit depths, and interlace methods are acceptable, and the
|
---|
3802 | input image is transformed as necessary to the requested in-memory format
|
---|
3803 | during the png_image_finish_read() step. The only caveat is that if you
|
---|
3804 | request a color-mapped image from a PNG that is full-color or makes
|
---|
3805 | complex use of an alpha channel the transformation is extremely lossy and the
|
---|
3806 | result may look terrible.
|
---|
3807 |
|
---|
3808 | To write a PNG file using the simplified API:
|
---|
3809 |
|
---|
3810 | 1) Declare a 'png_image' structure on the stack and memset()
|
---|
3811 | it to all zero.
|
---|
3812 |
|
---|
3813 | 2) Initialize the members of the structure that describe the
|
---|
3814 | image, setting the 'format' member to the format of the
|
---|
3815 | image samples.
|
---|
3816 |
|
---|
3817 | 3) Call the appropriate png_image_write... function with a
|
---|
3818 | pointer to the image and, if necessary, the color-map to write
|
---|
3819 | the PNG data.
|
---|
3820 |
|
---|
3821 | png_image is a structure that describes the in-memory format of an image
|
---|
3822 | when it is being read or defines the in-memory format of an image that you
|
---|
3823 | need to write. The "png_image" structure contains the following members:
|
---|
3824 |
|
---|
3825 | png_controlp opaque Initialize to NULL, free with png_image_free
|
---|
3826 | png_uint_32 version Set to PNG_IMAGE_VERSION
|
---|
3827 | png_uint_32 width Image width in pixels (columns)
|
---|
3828 | png_uint_32 height Image height in pixels (rows)
|
---|
3829 | png_uint_32 format Image format as defined below
|
---|
3830 | png_uint_32 flags A bit mask containing informational flags
|
---|
3831 | png_uint_32 colormap_entries; Number of entries in the color-map
|
---|
3832 | png_uint_32 warning_or_error;
|
---|
3833 | char message[64];
|
---|
3834 |
|
---|
3835 | In the event of an error or warning the "warning_or_error"
|
---|
3836 | field will be set to a non-zero value and the 'message' field will contain
|
---|
3837 | a '\0' terminated string with the libpng error or warning message. If both
|
---|
3838 | warnings and an error were encountered, only the error is recorded. If there
|
---|
3839 | are multiple warnings, only the first one is recorded.
|
---|
3840 |
|
---|
3841 | The upper 30 bits of the "warning_or_error" value are reserved; the low two
|
---|
3842 | bits contain a two bit code such that a value more than 1 indicates a failure
|
---|
3843 | in the API just called:
|
---|
3844 |
|
---|
3845 | 0 - no warning or error
|
---|
3846 | 1 - warning
|
---|
3847 | 2 - error
|
---|
3848 | 3 - error preceded by warning
|
---|
3849 |
|
---|
3850 | The pixels (samples) of the image have one to four channels whose components
|
---|
3851 | have original values in the range 0 to 1.0:
|
---|
3852 |
|
---|
3853 | 1: A single gray or luminance channel (G).
|
---|
3854 | 2: A gray/luminance channel and an alpha channel (GA).
|
---|
3855 | 3: Three red, green, blue color channels (RGB).
|
---|
3856 | 4: Three color channels and an alpha channel (RGBA).
|
---|
3857 |
|
---|
3858 | The channels are encoded in one of two ways:
|
---|
3859 |
|
---|
3860 | a) As a small integer, value 0..255, contained in a single byte. For the
|
---|
3861 | alpha channel the original value is simply value/255. For the color or
|
---|
3862 | luminance channels the value is encoded according to the sRGB specification
|
---|
3863 | and matches the 8-bit format expected by typical display devices.
|
---|
3864 |
|
---|
3865 | The color/gray channels are not scaled (pre-multiplied) by the alpha
|
---|
3866 | channel and are suitable for passing to color management software.
|
---|
3867 |
|
---|
3868 | b) As a value in the range 0..65535, contained in a 2-byte integer, in
|
---|
3869 | the native byte order of the platform on which the application is running.
|
---|
3870 | All channels can be converted to the original value by dividing by 65535; all
|
---|
3871 | channels are linear. Color channels use the RGB encoding (RGB end-points) of
|
---|
3872 | the sRGB specification. This encoding is identified by the
|
---|
3873 | PNG_FORMAT_FLAG_LINEAR flag below.
|
---|
3874 |
|
---|
3875 | When the simplified API needs to convert between sRGB and linear colorspaces,
|
---|
3876 | the actual sRGB transfer curve defined in the sRGB specification (see the
|
---|
3877 | article at https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SRGB) is used, not the gamma=1/2.2
|
---|
3878 | approximation used elsewhere in libpng.
|
---|
3879 |
|
---|
3880 | When an alpha channel is present it is expected to denote pixel coverage
|
---|
3881 | of the color or luminance channels and is returned as an associated alpha
|
---|
3882 | channel: the color/gray channels are scaled (pre-multiplied) by the alpha
|
---|
3883 | value.
|
---|
3884 |
|
---|
3885 | The samples are either contained directly in the image data, between 1 and 8
|
---|
3886 | bytes per pixel according to the encoding, or are held in a color-map indexed
|
---|
3887 | by bytes in the image data. In the case of a color-map the color-map entries
|
---|
3888 | are individual samples, encoded as above, and the image data has one byte per
|
---|
3889 | pixel to select the relevant sample from the color-map.
|
---|
3890 |
|
---|
3891 | PNG_FORMAT_*
|
---|
3892 |
|
---|
3893 | The #defines to be used in png_image::format. Each #define identifies a
|
---|
3894 | particular layout of channel data and, if present, alpha values. There are
|
---|
3895 | separate defines for each of the two component encodings.
|
---|
3896 |
|
---|
3897 | A format is built up using single bit flag values. All combinations are
|
---|
3898 | valid. Formats can be built up from the flag values or you can use one of
|
---|
3899 | the predefined values below. When testing formats always use the FORMAT_FLAG
|
---|
3900 | macros to test for individual features - future versions of the library may
|
---|
3901 | add new flags.
|
---|
3902 |
|
---|
3903 | When reading or writing color-mapped images the format should be set to the
|
---|
3904 | format of the entries in the color-map then png_image_{read,write}_colormap
|
---|
3905 | called to read or write the color-map and set the format correctly for the
|
---|
3906 | image data. Do not set the PNG_FORMAT_FLAG_COLORMAP bit directly!
|
---|
3907 |
|
---|
3908 | NOTE: libpng can be built with particular features disabled. If you see
|
---|
3909 | compiler errors because the definition of one of the following flags has been
|
---|
3910 | compiled out it is because libpng does not have the required support. It is
|
---|
3911 | possible, however, for the libpng configuration to enable the format on just
|
---|
3912 | read or just write; in that case you may see an error at run time.
|
---|
3913 | You can guard against this by checking for the definition of the
|
---|
3914 | appropriate "_SUPPORTED" macro, one of:
|
---|
3915 |
|
---|
3916 | PNG_SIMPLIFIED_{READ,WRITE}_{BGR,AFIRST}_SUPPORTED
|
---|
3917 |
|
---|
3918 | PNG_FORMAT_FLAG_ALPHA format with an alpha channel
|
---|
3919 | PNG_FORMAT_FLAG_COLOR color format: otherwise grayscale
|
---|
3920 | PNG_FORMAT_FLAG_LINEAR 2-byte channels else 1-byte
|
---|
3921 | PNG_FORMAT_FLAG_COLORMAP image data is color-mapped
|
---|
3922 | PNG_FORMAT_FLAG_BGR BGR colors, else order is RGB
|
---|
3923 | PNG_FORMAT_FLAG_AFIRST alpha channel comes first
|
---|
3924 |
|
---|
3925 | Supported formats are as follows. Future versions of libpng may support more
|
---|
3926 | formats; for compatibility with older versions simply check if the format
|
---|
3927 | macro is defined using #ifdef. These defines describe the in-memory layout
|
---|
3928 | of the components of the pixels of the image.
|
---|
3929 |
|
---|
3930 | First the single byte (sRGB) formats:
|
---|
3931 |
|
---|
3932 | PNG_FORMAT_GRAY
|
---|
3933 | PNG_FORMAT_GA
|
---|
3934 | PNG_FORMAT_AG
|
---|
3935 | PNG_FORMAT_RGB
|
---|
3936 | PNG_FORMAT_BGR
|
---|
3937 | PNG_FORMAT_RGBA
|
---|
3938 | PNG_FORMAT_ARGB
|
---|
3939 | PNG_FORMAT_BGRA
|
---|
3940 | PNG_FORMAT_ABGR
|
---|
3941 |
|
---|
3942 | Then the linear 2-byte formats. When naming these "Y" is used to
|
---|
3943 | indicate a luminance (gray) channel. The component order within the pixel
|
---|
3944 | is always the same - there is no provision for swapping the order of the
|
---|
3945 | components in the linear format. The components are 16-bit integers in
|
---|
3946 | the native byte order for your platform, and there is no provision for
|
---|
3947 | swapping the bytes to a different endian condition.
|
---|
3948 |
|
---|
3949 | PNG_FORMAT_LINEAR_Y
|
---|
3950 | PNG_FORMAT_LINEAR_Y_ALPHA
|
---|
3951 | PNG_FORMAT_LINEAR_RGB
|
---|
3952 | PNG_FORMAT_LINEAR_RGB_ALPHA
|
---|
3953 |
|
---|
3954 | With color-mapped formats the image data is one byte for each pixel. The byte
|
---|
3955 | is an index into the color-map which is formatted as above. To obtain a
|
---|
3956 | color-mapped format it is sufficient just to add the PNG_FOMAT_FLAG_COLORMAP
|
---|
3957 | to one of the above definitions, or you can use one of the definitions below.
|
---|
3958 |
|
---|
3959 | PNG_FORMAT_RGB_COLORMAP
|
---|
3960 | PNG_FORMAT_BGR_COLORMAP
|
---|
3961 | PNG_FORMAT_RGBA_COLORMAP
|
---|
3962 | PNG_FORMAT_ARGB_COLORMAP
|
---|
3963 | PNG_FORMAT_BGRA_COLORMAP
|
---|
3964 | PNG_FORMAT_ABGR_COLORMAP
|
---|
3965 |
|
---|
3966 | PNG_IMAGE macros
|
---|
3967 |
|
---|
3968 | These are convenience macros to derive information from a png_image
|
---|
3969 | structure. The PNG_IMAGE_SAMPLE_ macros return values appropriate to the
|
---|
3970 | actual image sample values - either the entries in the color-map or the
|
---|
3971 | pixels in the image. The PNG_IMAGE_PIXEL_ macros return corresponding values
|
---|
3972 | for the pixels and will always return 1 for color-mapped formats. The
|
---|
3973 | remaining macros return information about the rows in the image and the
|
---|
3974 | complete image.
|
---|
3975 |
|
---|
3976 | NOTE: All the macros that take a png_image::format parameter are compile time
|
---|
3977 | constants if the format parameter is, itself, a constant. Therefore these
|
---|
3978 | macros can be used in array declarations and case labels where required.
|
---|
3979 | Similarly the macros are also pre-processor constants (sizeof is not used) so
|
---|
3980 | they can be used in #if tests.
|
---|
3981 |
|
---|
3982 | PNG_IMAGE_SAMPLE_CHANNELS(fmt)
|
---|
3983 | Returns the total number of channels in a given format: 1..4
|
---|
3984 |
|
---|
3985 | PNG_IMAGE_SAMPLE_COMPONENT_SIZE(fmt)
|
---|
3986 | Returns the size in bytes of a single component of a pixel or color-map
|
---|
3987 | entry (as appropriate) in the image: 1 or 2.
|
---|
3988 |
|
---|
3989 | PNG_IMAGE_SAMPLE_SIZE(fmt)
|
---|
3990 | This is the size of the sample data for one sample. If the image is
|
---|
3991 | color-mapped it is the size of one color-map entry (and image pixels are
|
---|
3992 | one byte in size), otherwise it is the size of one image pixel.
|
---|
3993 |
|
---|
3994 | PNG_IMAGE_MAXIMUM_COLORMAP_COMPONENTS(fmt)
|
---|
3995 | The maximum size of the color-map required by the format expressed in a
|
---|
3996 | count of components. This can be used to compile-time allocate a
|
---|
3997 | color-map:
|
---|
3998 |
|
---|
3999 | png_uint_16 colormap[PNG_IMAGE_MAXIMUM_COLORMAP_COMPONENTS(linear_fmt)];
|
---|
4000 |
|
---|
4001 | png_byte colormap[PNG_IMAGE_MAXIMUM_COLORMAP_COMPONENTS(sRGB_fmt)];
|
---|
4002 |
|
---|
4003 | Alternatively use the PNG_IMAGE_COLORMAP_SIZE macro below to use the
|
---|
4004 | information from one of the png_image_begin_read_ APIs and dynamically
|
---|
4005 | allocate the required memory.
|
---|
4006 |
|
---|
4007 | PNG_IMAGE_COLORMAP_SIZE(fmt)
|
---|
4008 | The size of the color-map required by the format; this is the size of the
|
---|
4009 | color-map buffer passed to the png_image_{read,write}_colormap APIs. It is
|
---|
4010 | a fixed number determined by the format so can easily be allocated on the
|
---|
4011 | stack if necessary.
|
---|
4012 |
|
---|
4013 | Corresponding information about the pixels
|
---|
4014 |
|
---|
4015 | PNG_IMAGE_PIXEL_CHANNELS(fmt)
|
---|
4016 | The number of separate channels (components) in a pixel; 1 for a
|
---|
4017 | color-mapped image.
|
---|
4018 |
|
---|
4019 | PNG_IMAGE_PIXEL_COMPONENT_SIZE(fmt)\
|
---|
4020 | The size, in bytes, of each component in a pixel; 1 for a color-mapped
|
---|
4021 | image.
|
---|
4022 |
|
---|
4023 | PNG_IMAGE_PIXEL_SIZE(fmt)
|
---|
4024 | The size, in bytes, of a complete pixel; 1 for a color-mapped image.
|
---|
4025 |
|
---|
4026 | Information about the whole row, or whole image
|
---|
4027 |
|
---|
4028 | PNG_IMAGE_ROW_STRIDE(image)
|
---|
4029 | Returns the total number of components in a single row of the image; this
|
---|
4030 | is the minimum 'row stride', the minimum count of components between each
|
---|
4031 | row. For a color-mapped image this is the minimum number of bytes in a
|
---|
4032 | row.
|
---|
4033 |
|
---|
4034 | If you need the stride measured in bytes, row_stride_bytes is
|
---|
4035 | PNG_IMAGE_ROW_STRIDE(image) * PNG_IMAGE_PIXEL_COMPONENT_SIZE(fmt)
|
---|
4036 | plus any padding bytes that your application might need, for example
|
---|
4037 | to start the next row on a 4-byte boundary.
|
---|
4038 |
|
---|
4039 | PNG_IMAGE_BUFFER_SIZE(image, row_stride)
|
---|
4040 | Return the size, in bytes, of an image buffer given a png_image and a row
|
---|
4041 | stride - the number of components to leave space for in each row.
|
---|
4042 |
|
---|
4043 | PNG_IMAGE_SIZE(image)
|
---|
4044 | Return the size, in bytes, of the image in memory given just a png_image;
|
---|
4045 | the row stride is the minimum stride required for the image.
|
---|
4046 |
|
---|
4047 | PNG_IMAGE_COLORMAP_SIZE(image)
|
---|
4048 | Return the size, in bytes, of the color-map of this image. If the image
|
---|
4049 | format is not a color-map format this will return a size sufficient for
|
---|
4050 | 256 entries in the given format; check PNG_FORMAT_FLAG_COLORMAP if
|
---|
4051 | you don't want to allocate a color-map in this case.
|
---|
4052 |
|
---|
4053 | PNG_IMAGE_FLAG_*
|
---|
4054 |
|
---|
4055 | Flags containing additional information about the image are held in
|
---|
4056 | the 'flags' field of png_image.
|
---|
4057 |
|
---|
4058 | PNG_IMAGE_FLAG_COLORSPACE_NOT_sRGB == 0x01
|
---|
4059 | This indicates that the RGB values of the in-memory bitmap do not
|
---|
4060 | correspond to the red, green and blue end-points defined by sRGB.
|
---|
4061 |
|
---|
4062 | PNG_IMAGE_FLAG_FAST == 0x02
|
---|
4063 | On write emphasise speed over compression; the resultant PNG file will be
|
---|
4064 | larger but will be produced significantly faster, particular for large
|
---|
4065 | images. Do not use this option for images which will be distributed, only
|
---|
4066 | used it when producing intermediate files that will be read back in
|
---|
4067 | repeatedly. For a typical 24-bit image the option will double the read
|
---|
4068 | speed at the cost of increasing the image size by 25%, however for many
|
---|
4069 | more compressible images the PNG file can be 10 times larger with only a
|
---|
4070 | slight speed gain.
|
---|
4071 |
|
---|
4072 | PNG_IMAGE_FLAG_16BIT_sRGB == 0x04
|
---|
4073 | On read if the image is a 16-bit per component image and there is no gAMA
|
---|
4074 | or sRGB chunk assume that the components are sRGB encoded. Notice that
|
---|
4075 | images output by the simplified API always have gamma information; setting
|
---|
4076 | this flag only affects the interpretation of 16-bit images from an
|
---|
4077 | external source. It is recommended that the application expose this flag
|
---|
4078 | to the user; the user can normally easily recognize the difference between
|
---|
4079 | linear and sRGB encoding. This flag has no effect on write - the data
|
---|
4080 | passed to the write APIs must have the correct encoding (as defined
|
---|
4081 | above.)
|
---|
4082 |
|
---|
4083 | If the flag is not set (the default) input 16-bit per component data is
|
---|
4084 | assumed to be linear.
|
---|
4085 |
|
---|
4086 | NOTE: the flag can only be set after the png_image_begin_read_ call,
|
---|
4087 | because that call initializes the 'flags' field.
|
---|
4088 |
|
---|
4089 | READ APIs
|
---|
4090 |
|
---|
4091 | The png_image passed to the read APIs must have been initialized by setting
|
---|
4092 | the png_controlp field 'opaque' to NULL (or, better, memset the whole thing.)
|
---|
4093 |
|
---|
4094 | int png_image_begin_read_from_file( png_imagep image,
|
---|
4095 | const char *file_name)
|
---|
4096 |
|
---|
4097 | The named file is opened for read and the image header
|
---|
4098 | is filled in from the PNG header in the file.
|
---|
4099 |
|
---|
4100 | int png_image_begin_read_from_stdio (png_imagep image,
|
---|
4101 | FILE* file)
|
---|
4102 |
|
---|
4103 | The PNG header is read from the stdio FILE object.
|
---|
4104 |
|
---|
4105 | int png_image_begin_read_from_memory(png_imagep image,
|
---|
4106 | png_const_voidp memory, size_t size)
|
---|
4107 |
|
---|
4108 | The PNG header is read from the given memory buffer.
|
---|
4109 |
|
---|
4110 | int png_image_finish_read(png_imagep image,
|
---|
4111 | png_colorp background, void *buffer,
|
---|
4112 | png_int_32 row_stride, void *colormap));
|
---|
4113 |
|
---|
4114 | Finish reading the image into the supplied buffer and
|
---|
4115 | clean up the png_image structure.
|
---|
4116 |
|
---|
4117 | row_stride is the step, in png_byte or png_uint_16 units
|
---|
4118 | as appropriate, between adjacent rows. A positive stride
|
---|
4119 | indicates that the top-most row is first in the buffer -
|
---|
4120 | the normal top-down arrangement. A negative stride
|
---|
4121 | indicates that the bottom-most row is first in the buffer.
|
---|
4122 |
|
---|
4123 | background need only be supplied if an alpha channel must
|
---|
4124 | be removed from a png_byte format and the removal is to be
|
---|
4125 | done by compositing on a solid color; otherwise it may be
|
---|
4126 | NULL and any composition will be done directly onto the
|
---|
4127 | buffer. The value is an sRGB color to use for the
|
---|
4128 | background, for grayscale output the green channel is used.
|
---|
4129 |
|
---|
4130 | For linear output removing the alpha channel is always done
|
---|
4131 | by compositing on black.
|
---|
4132 |
|
---|
4133 | void png_image_free(png_imagep image)
|
---|
4134 |
|
---|
4135 | Free any data allocated by libpng in image->opaque,
|
---|
4136 | setting the pointer to NULL. May be called at any time
|
---|
4137 | after the structure is initialized.
|
---|
4138 |
|
---|
4139 | When the simplified API needs to convert between sRGB and linear colorspaces,
|
---|
4140 | the actual sRGB transfer curve defined in the sRGB specification (see the
|
---|
4141 | article at https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/SRGB) is used, not the gamma=1/2.2
|
---|
4142 | approximation used elsewhere in libpng.
|
---|
4143 |
|
---|
4144 | WRITE APIS
|
---|
4145 |
|
---|
4146 | For write you must initialize a png_image structure to describe the image to
|
---|
4147 | be written:
|
---|
4148 |
|
---|
4149 | version: must be set to PNG_IMAGE_VERSION
|
---|
4150 | opaque: must be initialized to NULL
|
---|
4151 | width: image width in pixels
|
---|
4152 | height: image height in rows
|
---|
4153 | format: the format of the data you wish to write
|
---|
4154 | flags: set to 0 unless one of the defined flags applies; set
|
---|
4155 | PNG_IMAGE_FLAG_COLORSPACE_NOT_sRGB for color format images
|
---|
4156 | where the RGB values do not correspond to the colors in sRGB.
|
---|
4157 | colormap_entries: set to the number of entries in the color-map (0 to 256)
|
---|
4158 |
|
---|
4159 | int png_image_write_to_file, (png_imagep image,
|
---|
4160 | const char *file, int convert_to_8bit, const void *buffer,
|
---|
4161 | png_int_32 row_stride, const void *colormap));
|
---|
4162 |
|
---|
4163 | Write the image to the named file.
|
---|
4164 |
|
---|
4165 | int png_image_write_to_memory (png_imagep image, void *memory,
|
---|
4166 | png_alloc_size_t * PNG_RESTRICT memory_bytes,
|
---|
4167 | int convert_to_8_bit, const void *buffer, ptrdiff_t row_stride,
|
---|
4168 | const void *colormap));
|
---|
4169 |
|
---|
4170 | Write the image to memory.
|
---|
4171 |
|
---|
4172 | int png_image_write_to_stdio(png_imagep image, FILE *file,
|
---|
4173 | int convert_to_8_bit, const void *buffer,
|
---|
4174 | png_int_32 row_stride, const void *colormap)
|
---|
4175 |
|
---|
4176 | Write the image to the given (FILE*).
|
---|
4177 |
|
---|
4178 | With all write APIs if image is in one of the linear formats with
|
---|
4179 | (png_uint_16) data then setting convert_to_8_bit will cause the output to be
|
---|
4180 | a (png_byte) PNG gamma encoded according to the sRGB specification, otherwise
|
---|
4181 | a 16-bit linear encoded PNG file is written.
|
---|
4182 |
|
---|
4183 | With all APIs row_stride is handled as in the read APIs - it is the spacing
|
---|
4184 | from one row to the next in component sized units (float) and if negative
|
---|
4185 | indicates a bottom-up row layout in the buffer. If you pass zero, libpng will
|
---|
4186 | calculate the row_stride for you from the width and number of channels.
|
---|
4187 |
|
---|
4188 | Note that the write API does not support interlacing, sub-8-bit pixels,
|
---|
4189 | indexed (paletted) images, or most ancillary chunks.
|
---|
4190 |
|
---|
4191 | VI. Modifying/Customizing libpng
|
---|
4192 |
|
---|
4193 | There are two issues here. The first is changing how libpng does
|
---|
4194 | standard things like memory allocation, input/output, and error handling.
|
---|
4195 | The second deals with more complicated things like adding new chunks,
|
---|
4196 | adding new transformations, and generally changing how libpng works.
|
---|
4197 | Both of those are compile-time issues; that is, they are generally
|
---|
4198 | determined at the time the code is written, and there is rarely a need
|
---|
4199 | to provide the user with a means of changing them.
|
---|
4200 |
|
---|
4201 | Memory allocation, input/output, and error handling
|
---|
4202 |
|
---|
4203 | All of the memory allocation, input/output, and error handling in libpng
|
---|
4204 | goes through callbacks that are user-settable. The default routines are
|
---|
4205 | in pngmem.c, pngrio.c, pngwio.c, and pngerror.c, respectively. To change
|
---|
4206 | these functions, call the appropriate png_set_*_fn() function.
|
---|
4207 |
|
---|
4208 | Memory allocation is done through the functions png_malloc(), png_calloc(),
|
---|
4209 | and png_free(). The png_malloc() and png_free() functions currently just
|
---|
4210 | call the standard C functions and png_calloc() calls png_malloc() and then
|
---|
4211 | clears the newly allocated memory to zero; note that png_calloc(png_ptr, size)
|
---|
4212 | is not the same as the calloc(number, size) function provided by stdlib.h.
|
---|
4213 | There is limited support for certain systems with segmented memory
|
---|
4214 | architectures and the types of pointers declared by png.h match this; you
|
---|
4215 | will have to use appropriate pointers in your application. If you prefer
|
---|
4216 | to use a different method of allocating and freeing data, you can use
|
---|
4217 | png_create_read_struct_2() or png_create_write_struct_2() to register your
|
---|
4218 | own functions as described above. These functions also provide a void
|
---|
4219 | pointer that can be retrieved via
|
---|
4220 |
|
---|
4221 | mem_ptr=png_get_mem_ptr(png_ptr);
|
---|
4222 |
|
---|
4223 | Your replacement memory functions must have prototypes as follows:
|
---|
4224 |
|
---|
4225 | png_voidp malloc_fn(png_structp png_ptr,
|
---|
4226 | png_alloc_size_t size);
|
---|
4227 |
|
---|
4228 | void free_fn(png_structp png_ptr, png_voidp ptr);
|
---|
4229 |
|
---|
4230 | Your malloc_fn() must return NULL in case of failure. The png_malloc()
|
---|
4231 | function will normally call png_error() if it receives a NULL from the
|
---|
4232 | system memory allocator or from your replacement malloc_fn().
|
---|
4233 |
|
---|
4234 | Your free_fn() will never be called with a NULL ptr, since libpng's
|
---|
4235 | png_free() checks for NULL before calling free_fn().
|
---|
4236 |
|
---|
4237 | Input/Output in libpng is done through png_read() and png_write(),
|
---|
4238 | which currently just call fread() and fwrite(). The FILE * is stored in
|
---|
4239 | png_struct and is initialized via png_init_io(). If you wish to change
|
---|
4240 | the method of I/O, the library supplies callbacks that you can set
|
---|
4241 | through the function png_set_read_fn() and png_set_write_fn() at run
|
---|
4242 | time, instead of calling the png_init_io() function. These functions
|
---|
4243 | also provide a void pointer that can be retrieved via the function
|
---|
4244 | png_get_io_ptr(). For example:
|
---|
4245 |
|
---|
4246 | png_set_read_fn(png_structp read_ptr,
|
---|
4247 | voidp read_io_ptr, png_rw_ptr read_data_fn)
|
---|
4248 |
|
---|
4249 | png_set_write_fn(png_structp write_ptr,
|
---|
4250 | voidp write_io_ptr, png_rw_ptr write_data_fn,
|
---|
4251 | png_flush_ptr output_flush_fn);
|
---|
4252 |
|
---|
4253 | voidp read_io_ptr = png_get_io_ptr(read_ptr);
|
---|
4254 | voidp write_io_ptr = png_get_io_ptr(write_ptr);
|
---|
4255 |
|
---|
4256 | The replacement I/O functions must have prototypes as follows:
|
---|
4257 |
|
---|
4258 | void user_read_data(png_structp png_ptr,
|
---|
4259 | png_bytep data, size_t length);
|
---|
4260 |
|
---|
4261 | void user_write_data(png_structp png_ptr,
|
---|
4262 | png_bytep data, size_t length);
|
---|
4263 |
|
---|
4264 | void user_flush_data(png_structp png_ptr);
|
---|
4265 |
|
---|
4266 | The user_read_data() function is responsible for detecting and
|
---|
4267 | handling end-of-data errors.
|
---|
4268 |
|
---|
4269 | Supplying NULL for the read, write, or flush functions sets them back
|
---|
4270 | to using the default C stream functions, which expect the io_ptr to
|
---|
4271 | point to a standard *FILE structure. It is probably a mistake
|
---|
4272 | to use NULL for one of write_data_fn and output_flush_fn but not both
|
---|
4273 | of them, unless you have built libpng with PNG_NO_WRITE_FLUSH defined.
|
---|
4274 | It is an error to read from a write stream, and vice versa.
|
---|
4275 |
|
---|
4276 | Error handling in libpng is done through png_error() and png_warning().
|
---|
4277 | Errors handled through png_error() are fatal, meaning that png_error()
|
---|
4278 | should never return to its caller. Currently, this is handled via
|
---|
4279 | setjmp() and longjmp() (unless you have compiled libpng with
|
---|
4280 | PNG_NO_SETJMP, in which case it is handled via PNG_ABORT()),
|
---|
4281 | but you could change this to do things like exit() if you should wish,
|
---|
4282 | as long as your function does not return.
|
---|
4283 |
|
---|
4284 | On non-fatal errors, png_warning() is called
|
---|
4285 | to print a warning message, and then control returns to the calling code.
|
---|
4286 | By default png_error() and png_warning() print a message on stderr via
|
---|
4287 | fprintf() unless the library is compiled with PNG_NO_CONSOLE_IO defined
|
---|
4288 | (because you don't want the messages) or PNG_NO_STDIO defined (because
|
---|
4289 | fprintf() isn't available). If you wish to change the behavior of the error
|
---|
4290 | functions, you will need to set up your own message callbacks. These
|
---|
4291 | functions are normally supplied at the time that the png_struct is created.
|
---|
4292 | It is also possible to redirect errors and warnings to your own replacement
|
---|
4293 | functions after png_create_*_struct() has been called by calling:
|
---|
4294 |
|
---|
4295 | png_set_error_fn(png_structp png_ptr,
|
---|
4296 | png_voidp error_ptr, png_error_ptr error_fn,
|
---|
4297 | png_error_ptr warning_fn);
|
---|
4298 |
|
---|
4299 | If NULL is supplied for either error_fn or warning_fn, then the libpng
|
---|
4300 | default function will be used, calling fprintf() and/or longjmp() if a
|
---|
4301 | problem is encountered. The replacement error functions should have
|
---|
4302 | parameters as follows:
|
---|
4303 |
|
---|
4304 | void user_error_fn(png_structp png_ptr,
|
---|
4305 | png_const_charp error_msg);
|
---|
4306 |
|
---|
4307 | void user_warning_fn(png_structp png_ptr,
|
---|
4308 | png_const_charp warning_msg);
|
---|
4309 |
|
---|
4310 | Then, within your user_error_fn or user_warning_fn, you can retrieve
|
---|
4311 | the error_ptr if you need it, by calling
|
---|
4312 |
|
---|
4313 | png_voidp error_ptr = png_get_error_ptr(png_ptr);
|
---|
4314 |
|
---|
4315 | The motivation behind using setjmp() and longjmp() is the C++ throw and
|
---|
4316 | catch exception handling methods. This makes the code much easier to write,
|
---|
4317 | as there is no need to check every return code of every function call.
|
---|
4318 | However, there are some uncertainties about the status of local variables
|
---|
4319 | after a longjmp, so the user may want to be careful about doing anything
|
---|
4320 | after setjmp returns non-zero besides returning itself. Consult your
|
---|
4321 | compiler documentation for more details. For an alternative approach, you
|
---|
4322 | may wish to use the "cexcept" facility (see https://cexcept.sourceforge.io/),
|
---|
4323 | which is illustrated in pngvalid.c and in contrib/visupng.
|
---|
4324 |
|
---|
4325 | Beginning in libpng-1.4.0, the png_set_benign_errors() API became available.
|
---|
4326 | You can use this to handle certain errors (normally handled as errors)
|
---|
4327 | as warnings.
|
---|
4328 |
|
---|
4329 | png_set_benign_errors (png_ptr, int allowed);
|
---|
4330 |
|
---|
4331 | allowed: 0: treat png_benign_error() as an error.
|
---|
4332 | 1: treat png_benign_error() as a warning.
|
---|
4333 |
|
---|
4334 | As of libpng-1.6.0, the default condition is to treat benign errors as
|
---|
4335 | warnings while reading and as errors while writing.
|
---|
4336 |
|
---|
4337 | Custom chunks
|
---|
4338 |
|
---|
4339 | If you need to read or write custom chunks, you may need to get deeper
|
---|
4340 | into the libpng code. The library now has mechanisms for storing
|
---|
4341 | and writing chunks of unknown type; you can even declare callbacks
|
---|
4342 | for custom chunks. However, this may not be good enough if the
|
---|
4343 | library code itself needs to know about interactions between your
|
---|
4344 | chunk and existing `intrinsic' chunks.
|
---|
4345 |
|
---|
4346 | If you need to write a new intrinsic chunk, first read the PNG
|
---|
4347 | specification. Acquire a first level of understanding of how it works.
|
---|
4348 | Pay particular attention to the sections that describe chunk names,
|
---|
4349 | and look at how other chunks were designed, so you can do things
|
---|
4350 | similarly. Second, check out the sections of libpng that read and
|
---|
4351 | write chunks. Try to find a chunk that is similar to yours and use
|
---|
4352 | it as a template. More details can be found in the comments inside
|
---|
4353 | the code. It is best to handle private or unknown chunks in a generic method,
|
---|
4354 | via callback functions, instead of by modifying libpng functions. This
|
---|
4355 | is illustrated in pngtest.c, which uses a callback function to handle a
|
---|
4356 | private "vpAg" chunk and the new "sTER" chunk, which are both unknown to
|
---|
4357 | libpng.
|
---|
4358 |
|
---|
4359 | If you wish to write your own transformation for the data, look through
|
---|
4360 | the part of the code that does the transformations, and check out some of
|
---|
4361 | the simpler ones to get an idea of how they work. Try to find a similar
|
---|
4362 | transformation to the one you want to add and copy off of it. More details
|
---|
4363 | can be found in the comments inside the code itself.
|
---|
4364 |
|
---|
4365 | Configuring for gui/windowing platforms:
|
---|
4366 |
|
---|
4367 | You will need to write new error and warning functions that use the GUI
|
---|
4368 | interface, as described previously, and set them to be the error and
|
---|
4369 | warning functions at the time that png_create_*_struct() is called,
|
---|
4370 | in order to have them available during the structure initialization.
|
---|
4371 | They can be changed later via png_set_error_fn(). On some compilers,
|
---|
4372 | you may also have to change the memory allocators (png_malloc, etc.).
|
---|
4373 |
|
---|
4374 | Configuring zlib:
|
---|
4375 |
|
---|
4376 | There are special functions to configure the compression. Perhaps the
|
---|
4377 | most useful one changes the compression level, which currently uses
|
---|
4378 | input compression values in the range 0 - 9. The library normally
|
---|
4379 | uses the default compression level (Z_DEFAULT_COMPRESSION = 6). Tests
|
---|
4380 | have shown that for a large majority of images, compression values in
|
---|
4381 | the range 3-6 compress nearly as well as higher levels, and do so much
|
---|
4382 | faster. For online applications it may be desirable to have maximum speed
|
---|
4383 | (Z_BEST_SPEED = 1). With versions of zlib after v0.99, you can also
|
---|
4384 | specify no compression (Z_NO_COMPRESSION = 0), but this would create
|
---|
4385 | files larger than just storing the raw bitmap. You can specify the
|
---|
4386 | compression level by calling:
|
---|
4387 |
|
---|
4388 | #include zlib.h
|
---|
4389 | png_set_compression_level(png_ptr, level);
|
---|
4390 |
|
---|
4391 | Another useful one is to reduce the memory level used by the library.
|
---|
4392 | The memory level defaults to 8, but it can be lowered if you are
|
---|
4393 | short on memory (running DOS, for example, where you only have 640K).
|
---|
4394 | Note that the memory level does have an effect on compression; among
|
---|
4395 | other things, lower levels will result in sections of incompressible
|
---|
4396 | data being emitted in smaller stored blocks, with a correspondingly
|
---|
4397 | larger relative overhead of up to 15% in the worst case.
|
---|
4398 |
|
---|
4399 | #include zlib.h
|
---|
4400 | png_set_compression_mem_level(png_ptr, level);
|
---|
4401 |
|
---|
4402 | The other functions are for configuring zlib. They are not recommended
|
---|
4403 | for normal use and may result in writing an invalid PNG file. See
|
---|
4404 | zlib.h for more information on what these mean.
|
---|
4405 |
|
---|
4406 | #include zlib.h
|
---|
4407 | png_set_compression_strategy(png_ptr,
|
---|
4408 | strategy);
|
---|
4409 |
|
---|
4410 | png_set_compression_window_bits(png_ptr,
|
---|
4411 | window_bits);
|
---|
4412 |
|
---|
4413 | png_set_compression_method(png_ptr, method);
|
---|
4414 |
|
---|
4415 | This controls the size of the IDAT chunks (default 8192):
|
---|
4416 |
|
---|
4417 | png_set_compression_buffer_size(png_ptr, size);
|
---|
4418 |
|
---|
4419 | As of libpng version 1.5.4, additional APIs became
|
---|
4420 | available to set these separately for non-IDAT
|
---|
4421 | compressed chunks such as zTXt, iTXt, and iCCP:
|
---|
4422 |
|
---|
4423 | #include zlib.h
|
---|
4424 | #if PNG_LIBPNG_VER >= 10504
|
---|
4425 | png_set_text_compression_level(png_ptr, level);
|
---|
4426 |
|
---|
4427 | png_set_text_compression_mem_level(png_ptr, level);
|
---|
4428 |
|
---|
4429 | png_set_text_compression_strategy(png_ptr,
|
---|
4430 | strategy);
|
---|
4431 |
|
---|
4432 | png_set_text_compression_window_bits(png_ptr,
|
---|
4433 | window_bits);
|
---|
4434 |
|
---|
4435 | png_set_text_compression_method(png_ptr, method);
|
---|
4436 | #endif
|
---|
4437 |
|
---|
4438 | Controlling row filtering
|
---|
4439 |
|
---|
4440 | If you want to control whether libpng uses filtering or not, which
|
---|
4441 | filters are used, and how it goes about picking row filters, you
|
---|
4442 | can call one of these functions. The selection and configuration
|
---|
4443 | of row filters can have a significant impact on the size and
|
---|
4444 | encoding speed and a somewhat lesser impact on the decoding speed
|
---|
4445 | of an image. Filtering is enabled by default for RGB and grayscale
|
---|
4446 | images (with and without alpha), but not for paletted images nor
|
---|
4447 | for any images with bit depths less than 8 bits/pixel.
|
---|
4448 |
|
---|
4449 | The 'method' parameter sets the main filtering method, which is
|
---|
4450 | currently only '0' in the PNG 1.2 specification. The 'filters'
|
---|
4451 | parameter sets which filter(s), if any, should be used for each
|
---|
4452 | scanline. Possible values are PNG_ALL_FILTERS, PNG_NO_FILTERS,
|
---|
4453 | or PNG_FAST_FILTERS to turn filtering on and off, or to turn on
|
---|
4454 | just the fast-decoding subset of filters, respectively.
|
---|
4455 |
|
---|
4456 | Individual filter types are PNG_FILTER_NONE, PNG_FILTER_SUB,
|
---|
4457 | PNG_FILTER_UP, PNG_FILTER_AVG, PNG_FILTER_PAETH, which can be bitwise
|
---|
4458 | ORed together with '|' to specify one or more filters to use.
|
---|
4459 | These filters are described in more detail in the PNG specification.
|
---|
4460 | If you intend to change the filter type during the course of writing
|
---|
4461 | the image, you should start with flags set for all of the filters
|
---|
4462 | you intend to use so that libpng can initialize its internal
|
---|
4463 | structures appropriately for all of the filter types. (Note that this
|
---|
4464 | means the first row must always be adaptively filtered, because libpng
|
---|
4465 | currently does not allocate the filter buffers until png_write_row()
|
---|
4466 | is called for the first time.)
|
---|
4467 |
|
---|
4468 | filters = PNG_NO_FILTERS;
|
---|
4469 | filters = PNG_ALL_FILTERS;
|
---|
4470 | filters = PNG_FAST_FILTERS;
|
---|
4471 |
|
---|
4472 | or
|
---|
4473 |
|
---|
4474 | filters = PNG_FILTER_NONE | PNG_FILTER_SUB |
|
---|
4475 | PNG_FILTER_UP | PNG_FILTER_AVG |
|
---|
4476 | PNG_FILTER_PAETH;
|
---|
4477 |
|
---|
4478 | png_set_filter(png_ptr, PNG_FILTER_TYPE_BASE,
|
---|
4479 | filters);
|
---|
4480 |
|
---|
4481 | The second parameter can also be
|
---|
4482 | PNG_INTRAPIXEL_DIFFERENCING if you are
|
---|
4483 | writing a PNG to be embedded in a MNG
|
---|
4484 | datastream. This parameter must be the
|
---|
4485 | same as the value of filter_method used
|
---|
4486 | in png_set_IHDR().
|
---|
4487 |
|
---|
4488 | Requesting debug printout
|
---|
4489 |
|
---|
4490 | The macro definition PNG_DEBUG can be used to request debugging
|
---|
4491 | printout. Set it to an integer value in the range 0 to 3. Higher
|
---|
4492 | numbers result in increasing amounts of debugging information. The
|
---|
4493 | information is printed to the "stderr" file, unless another file
|
---|
4494 | name is specified in the PNG_DEBUG_FILE macro definition.
|
---|
4495 |
|
---|
4496 | When PNG_DEBUG > 0, the following functions (macros) become available:
|
---|
4497 |
|
---|
4498 | png_debug(level, message)
|
---|
4499 | png_debug1(level, message, p1)
|
---|
4500 | png_debug2(level, message, p1, p2)
|
---|
4501 |
|
---|
4502 | in which "level" is compared to PNG_DEBUG to decide whether to print
|
---|
4503 | the message, "message" is the formatted string to be printed,
|
---|
4504 | and p1 and p2 are parameters that are to be embedded in the string
|
---|
4505 | according to printf-style formatting directives. For example,
|
---|
4506 |
|
---|
4507 | png_debug1(2, "foo=%d", foo);
|
---|
4508 |
|
---|
4509 | is expanded to
|
---|
4510 |
|
---|
4511 | if (PNG_DEBUG > 2)
|
---|
4512 | fprintf(PNG_DEBUG_FILE, "foo=%d\n", foo);
|
---|
4513 |
|
---|
4514 | When PNG_DEBUG is defined but is zero, the macros aren't defined, but you
|
---|
4515 | can still use PNG_DEBUG to control your own debugging:
|
---|
4516 |
|
---|
4517 | #ifdef PNG_DEBUG
|
---|
4518 | fprintf(stderr, ...
|
---|
4519 | #endif
|
---|
4520 |
|
---|
4521 | When PNG_DEBUG = 1, the macros are defined, but only png_debug statements
|
---|
4522 | having level = 0 will be printed. There aren't any such statements in
|
---|
4523 | this version of libpng, but if you insert some they will be printed.
|
---|
4524 |
|
---|
4525 | VII. MNG support
|
---|
4526 |
|
---|
4527 | The MNG specification (available at http://www.libpng.org/pub/mng) allows
|
---|
4528 | certain extensions to PNG for PNG images that are embedded in MNG datastreams.
|
---|
4529 | Libpng can support some of these extensions. To enable them, use the
|
---|
4530 | png_permit_mng_features() function:
|
---|
4531 |
|
---|
4532 | feature_set = png_permit_mng_features(png_ptr, mask)
|
---|
4533 |
|
---|
4534 | mask is a png_uint_32 containing the bitwise OR of the
|
---|
4535 | features you want to enable. These include
|
---|
4536 | PNG_FLAG_MNG_EMPTY_PLTE
|
---|
4537 | PNG_FLAG_MNG_FILTER_64
|
---|
4538 | PNG_ALL_MNG_FEATURES
|
---|
4539 |
|
---|
4540 | feature_set is a png_uint_32 that is the bitwise AND of
|
---|
4541 | your mask with the set of MNG features that is
|
---|
4542 | supported by the version of libpng that you are using.
|
---|
4543 |
|
---|
4544 | It is an error to use this function when reading or writing a standalone
|
---|
4545 | PNG file with the PNG 8-byte signature. The PNG datastream must be wrapped
|
---|
4546 | in a MNG datastream. As a minimum, it must have the MNG 8-byte signature
|
---|
4547 | and the MHDR and MEND chunks. Libpng does not provide support for these
|
---|
4548 | or any other MNG chunks; your application must provide its own support for
|
---|
4549 | them. You may wish to consider using libmng (available at
|
---|
4550 | https://www.libmng.com/) instead.
|
---|
4551 |
|
---|
4552 | VIII. Changes to Libpng from version 0.88
|
---|
4553 |
|
---|
4554 | It should be noted that versions of libpng later than 0.96 are not
|
---|
4555 | distributed by the original libpng author, Guy Schalnat, nor by
|
---|
4556 | Andreas Dilger, who had taken over from Guy during 1996 and 1997, and
|
---|
4557 | distributed versions 0.89 through 0.96, but rather by another member
|
---|
4558 | of the original PNG Group, Glenn Randers-Pehrson. Guy and Andreas are
|
---|
4559 | still alive and well, but they have moved on to other things.
|
---|
4560 |
|
---|
4561 | The old libpng functions png_read_init(), png_write_init(),
|
---|
4562 | png_info_init(), png_read_destroy(), and png_write_destroy() have been
|
---|
4563 | moved to PNG_INTERNAL in version 0.95 to discourage their use. These
|
---|
4564 | functions will be removed from libpng version 1.4.0.
|
---|
4565 |
|
---|
4566 | The preferred method of creating and initializing the libpng structures is
|
---|
4567 | via the png_create_read_struct(), png_create_write_struct(), and
|
---|
4568 | png_create_info_struct() because they isolate the size of the structures
|
---|
4569 | from the application, allow version error checking, and also allow the
|
---|
4570 | use of custom error handling routines during the initialization, which
|
---|
4571 | the old functions do not. The functions png_read_destroy() and
|
---|
4572 | png_write_destroy() do not actually free the memory that libpng
|
---|
4573 | allocated for these structs, but just reset the data structures, so they
|
---|
4574 | can be used instead of png_destroy_read_struct() and
|
---|
4575 | png_destroy_write_struct() if you feel there is too much system overhead
|
---|
4576 | allocating and freeing the png_struct for each image read.
|
---|
4577 |
|
---|
4578 | Setting the error callbacks via png_set_message_fn() before
|
---|
4579 | png_read_init() as was suggested in libpng-0.88 is no longer supported
|
---|
4580 | because this caused applications that do not use custom error functions
|
---|
4581 | to fail if the png_ptr was not initialized to zero. It is still possible
|
---|
4582 | to set the error callbacks AFTER png_read_init(), or to change them with
|
---|
4583 | png_set_error_fn(), which is essentially the same function, but with a new
|
---|
4584 | name to force compilation errors with applications that try to use the old
|
---|
4585 | method.
|
---|
4586 |
|
---|
4587 | Support for the sCAL, iCCP, iTXt, and sPLT chunks was added at libpng-1.0.6;
|
---|
4588 | however, iTXt support was not enabled by default.
|
---|
4589 |
|
---|
4590 | Starting with version 1.0.7, you can find out which version of the library
|
---|
4591 | you are using at run-time:
|
---|
4592 |
|
---|
4593 | png_uint_32 libpng_vn = png_access_version_number();
|
---|
4594 |
|
---|
4595 | The number libpng_vn is constructed from the major version, minor
|
---|
4596 | version with leading zero, and release number with leading zero,
|
---|
4597 | (e.g., libpng_vn for version 1.0.7 is 10007).
|
---|
4598 |
|
---|
4599 | Note that this function does not take a png_ptr, so you can call it
|
---|
4600 | before you've created one.
|
---|
4601 |
|
---|
4602 | You can also check which version of png.h you used when compiling your
|
---|
4603 | application:
|
---|
4604 |
|
---|
4605 | png_uint_32 application_vn = PNG_LIBPNG_VER;
|
---|
4606 |
|
---|
4607 | IX. Changes to Libpng from version 1.0.x to 1.2.x
|
---|
4608 |
|
---|
4609 | Support for user memory management was enabled by default. To
|
---|
4610 | accomplish this, the functions png_create_read_struct_2(),
|
---|
4611 | png_create_write_struct_2(), png_set_mem_fn(), png_get_mem_ptr(),
|
---|
4612 | png_malloc_default(), and png_free_default() were added.
|
---|
4613 |
|
---|
4614 | Support for the iTXt chunk has been enabled by default as of
|
---|
4615 | version 1.2.41.
|
---|
4616 |
|
---|
4617 | Support for certain MNG features was enabled.
|
---|
4618 |
|
---|
4619 | Support for numbered error messages was added. However, we never got
|
---|
4620 | around to actually numbering the error messages. The function
|
---|
4621 | png_set_strip_error_numbers() was added (Note: the prototype for this
|
---|
4622 | function was inadvertently removed from png.h in PNG_NO_ASSEMBLER_CODE
|
---|
4623 | builds of libpng-1.2.15. It was restored in libpng-1.2.36).
|
---|
4624 |
|
---|
4625 | The png_malloc_warn() function was added at libpng-1.2.3. This issues
|
---|
4626 | a png_warning and returns NULL instead of aborting when it fails to
|
---|
4627 | acquire the requested memory allocation.
|
---|
4628 |
|
---|
4629 | Support for setting user limits on image width and height was enabled
|
---|
4630 | by default. The functions png_set_user_limits(), png_get_user_width_max(),
|
---|
4631 | and png_get_user_height_max() were added at libpng-1.2.6.
|
---|
4632 |
|
---|
4633 | The png_set_add_alpha() function was added at libpng-1.2.7.
|
---|
4634 |
|
---|
4635 | The function png_set_expand_gray_1_2_4_to_8() was added at libpng-1.2.9.
|
---|
4636 | Unlike png_set_gray_1_2_4_to_8(), the new function does not expand the
|
---|
4637 | tRNS chunk to alpha. The png_set_gray_1_2_4_to_8() function is
|
---|
4638 | deprecated.
|
---|
4639 |
|
---|
4640 | A number of macro definitions in support of runtime selection of
|
---|
4641 | assembler code features (especially Intel MMX code support) were
|
---|
4642 | added at libpng-1.2.0:
|
---|
4643 |
|
---|
4644 | PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_SUPPORT_COMPILED
|
---|
4645 | PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_SUPPORT_IN_CPU
|
---|
4646 | PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_READ_COMBINE_ROW
|
---|
4647 | PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_READ_INTERLACE
|
---|
4648 | PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_READ_FILTER_SUB
|
---|
4649 | PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_READ_FILTER_UP
|
---|
4650 | PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_READ_FILTER_AVG
|
---|
4651 | PNG_ASM_FLAG_MMX_READ_FILTER_PAETH
|
---|
4652 | PNG_ASM_FLAGS_INITIALIZED
|
---|
4653 | PNG_MMX_READ_FLAGS
|
---|
4654 | PNG_MMX_FLAGS
|
---|
4655 | PNG_MMX_WRITE_FLAGS
|
---|
4656 | PNG_MMX_FLAGS
|
---|
4657 |
|
---|
4658 | We added the following functions in support of runtime
|
---|
4659 | selection of assembler code features:
|
---|
4660 |
|
---|
4661 | png_get_mmx_flagmask()
|
---|
4662 | png_set_mmx_thresholds()
|
---|
4663 | png_get_asm_flags()
|
---|
4664 | png_get_mmx_bitdepth_threshold()
|
---|
4665 | png_get_mmx_rowbytes_threshold()
|
---|
4666 | png_set_asm_flags()
|
---|
4667 |
|
---|
4668 | We replaced all of these functions with simple stubs in libpng-1.2.20,
|
---|
4669 | when the Intel assembler code was removed due to a licensing issue.
|
---|
4670 |
|
---|
4671 | These macros are deprecated:
|
---|
4672 |
|
---|
4673 | PNG_READ_TRANSFORMS_NOT_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4674 | PNG_PROGRESSIVE_READ_NOT_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4675 | PNG_NO_SEQUENTIAL_READ_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4676 | PNG_WRITE_TRANSFORMS_NOT_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4677 | PNG_READ_ANCILLARY_CHUNKS_NOT_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4678 | PNG_WRITE_ANCILLARY_CHUNKS_NOT_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4679 |
|
---|
4680 | They have been replaced, respectively, by:
|
---|
4681 |
|
---|
4682 | PNG_NO_READ_TRANSFORMS
|
---|
4683 | PNG_NO_PROGRESSIVE_READ
|
---|
4684 | PNG_NO_SEQUENTIAL_READ
|
---|
4685 | PNG_NO_WRITE_TRANSFORMS
|
---|
4686 | PNG_NO_READ_ANCILLARY_CHUNKS
|
---|
4687 | PNG_NO_WRITE_ANCILLARY_CHUNKS
|
---|
4688 |
|
---|
4689 | PNG_MAX_UINT was replaced with PNG_UINT_31_MAX. It has been
|
---|
4690 | deprecated since libpng-1.0.16 and libpng-1.2.6.
|
---|
4691 |
|
---|
4692 | The function
|
---|
4693 | png_check_sig(sig, num)
|
---|
4694 | was replaced with
|
---|
4695 | !png_sig_cmp(sig, 0, num)
|
---|
4696 | It has been deprecated since libpng-0.90.
|
---|
4697 |
|
---|
4698 | The function
|
---|
4699 | png_set_gray_1_2_4_to_8()
|
---|
4700 | which also expands tRNS to alpha was replaced with
|
---|
4701 | png_set_expand_gray_1_2_4_to_8()
|
---|
4702 | which does not. It has been deprecated since libpng-1.0.18 and 1.2.9.
|
---|
4703 |
|
---|
4704 | X. Changes to Libpng from version 1.0.x/1.2.x to 1.4.x
|
---|
4705 |
|
---|
4706 | Private libpng prototypes and macro definitions were moved from
|
---|
4707 | png.h and pngconf.h into a new pngpriv.h header file.
|
---|
4708 |
|
---|
4709 | Functions png_set_benign_errors(), png_benign_error(), and
|
---|
4710 | png_chunk_benign_error() were added.
|
---|
4711 |
|
---|
4712 | Support for setting the maximum amount of memory that the application
|
---|
4713 | will allocate for reading chunks was added, as a security measure.
|
---|
4714 | The functions png_set_chunk_cache_max() and png_get_chunk_cache_max()
|
---|
4715 | were added to the library.
|
---|
4716 |
|
---|
4717 | We implemented support for I/O states by adding png_ptr member io_state
|
---|
4718 | and functions png_get_io_chunk_name() and png_get_io_state() in pngget.c
|
---|
4719 |
|
---|
4720 | We added PNG_TRANSFORM_GRAY_TO_RGB to the available high-level
|
---|
4721 | input transforms.
|
---|
4722 |
|
---|
4723 | Checking for and reporting of errors in the IHDR chunk is more thorough.
|
---|
4724 |
|
---|
4725 | Support for global arrays was removed, to improve thread safety.
|
---|
4726 |
|
---|
4727 | Some obsolete/deprecated macros and functions have been removed.
|
---|
4728 |
|
---|
4729 | Typecasted NULL definitions such as
|
---|
4730 | #define png_voidp_NULL (png_voidp)NULL
|
---|
4731 | were eliminated. If you used these in your application, just use
|
---|
4732 | NULL instead.
|
---|
4733 |
|
---|
4734 | The png_struct and info_struct members "trans" and "trans_values" were
|
---|
4735 | changed to "trans_alpha" and "trans_color", respectively.
|
---|
4736 |
|
---|
4737 | The obsolete, unused pnggccrd.c and pngvcrd.c files and related makefiles
|
---|
4738 | were removed.
|
---|
4739 |
|
---|
4740 | The PNG_1_0_X and PNG_1_2_X macros were eliminated.
|
---|
4741 |
|
---|
4742 | The PNG_LEGACY_SUPPORTED macro was eliminated.
|
---|
4743 |
|
---|
4744 | Many WIN32_WCE #ifdefs were removed.
|
---|
4745 |
|
---|
4746 | The functions png_read_init(info_ptr), png_write_init(info_ptr),
|
---|
4747 | png_info_init(info_ptr), png_read_destroy(), and png_write_destroy()
|
---|
4748 | have been removed. They have been deprecated since libpng-0.95.
|
---|
4749 |
|
---|
4750 | The png_permit_empty_plte() was removed. It has been deprecated
|
---|
4751 | since libpng-1.0.9. Use png_permit_mng_features() instead.
|
---|
4752 |
|
---|
4753 | We removed the obsolete stub functions png_get_mmx_flagmask(),
|
---|
4754 | png_set_mmx_thresholds(), png_get_asm_flags(),
|
---|
4755 | png_get_mmx_bitdepth_threshold(), png_get_mmx_rowbytes_threshold(),
|
---|
4756 | png_set_asm_flags(), and png_mmx_supported()
|
---|
4757 |
|
---|
4758 | We removed the obsolete png_check_sig(), png_memcpy_check(), and
|
---|
4759 | png_memset_check() functions. Instead use !png_sig_cmp(), memcpy(),
|
---|
4760 | and memset(), respectively.
|
---|
4761 |
|
---|
4762 | The function png_set_gray_1_2_4_to_8() was removed. It has been
|
---|
4763 | deprecated since libpng-1.0.18 and 1.2.9, when it was replaced with
|
---|
4764 | png_set_expand_gray_1_2_4_to_8() because the former function also
|
---|
4765 | expanded any tRNS chunk to an alpha channel.
|
---|
4766 |
|
---|
4767 | Macros for png_get_uint_16, png_get_uint_32, and png_get_int_32
|
---|
4768 | were added and are used by default instead of the corresponding
|
---|
4769 | functions. Unfortunately,
|
---|
4770 | from libpng-1.4.0 until 1.4.4, the png_get_uint_16 macro (but not the
|
---|
4771 | function) incorrectly returned a value of type png_uint_32.
|
---|
4772 |
|
---|
4773 | We changed the prototype for png_malloc() from
|
---|
4774 | png_malloc(png_structp png_ptr, png_uint_32 size)
|
---|
4775 | to
|
---|
4776 | png_malloc(png_structp png_ptr, png_alloc_size_t size)
|
---|
4777 |
|
---|
4778 | This also applies to the prototype for the user replacement malloc_fn().
|
---|
4779 |
|
---|
4780 | The png_calloc() function was added and is used in place of
|
---|
4781 | of "png_malloc(); memset();" except in the case in png_read_png()
|
---|
4782 | where the array consists of pointers; in this case a "for" loop is used
|
---|
4783 | after the png_malloc() to set the pointers to NULL, to give robust.
|
---|
4784 | behavior in case the application runs out of memory part-way through
|
---|
4785 | the process.
|
---|
4786 |
|
---|
4787 | We changed the prototypes of png_get_compression_buffer_size() and
|
---|
4788 | png_set_compression_buffer_size() to work with size_t instead of
|
---|
4789 | png_uint_32.
|
---|
4790 |
|
---|
4791 | Support for numbered error messages was removed by default, since we
|
---|
4792 | never got around to actually numbering the error messages. The function
|
---|
4793 | png_set_strip_error_numbers() was removed from the library by default.
|
---|
4794 |
|
---|
4795 | The png_zalloc() and png_zfree() functions are no longer exported.
|
---|
4796 | The png_zalloc() function no longer zeroes out the memory that it
|
---|
4797 | allocates. Applications that called png_zalloc(png_ptr, number, size)
|
---|
4798 | can call png_calloc(png_ptr, number*size) instead, and can call
|
---|
4799 | png_free() instead of png_zfree().
|
---|
4800 |
|
---|
4801 | Support for dithering was disabled by default in libpng-1.4.0, because
|
---|
4802 | it has not been well tested and doesn't actually "dither".
|
---|
4803 | The code was not
|
---|
4804 | removed, however, and could be enabled by building libpng with
|
---|
4805 | PNG_READ_DITHER_SUPPORTED defined. In libpng-1.4.2, this support
|
---|
4806 | was re-enabled, but the function was renamed png_set_quantize() to
|
---|
4807 | reflect more accurately what it actually does. At the same time,
|
---|
4808 | the PNG_DITHER_[RED,GREEN_BLUE]_BITS macros were also renamed to
|
---|
4809 | PNG_QUANTIZE_[RED,GREEN,BLUE]_BITS, and PNG_READ_DITHER_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4810 | was renamed to PNG_READ_QUANTIZE_SUPPORTED.
|
---|
4811 |
|
---|
4812 | We removed the trailing '.' from the warning and error messages.
|
---|
4813 |
|
---|
4814 | XI. Changes to Libpng from version 1.4.x to 1.5.x
|
---|
4815 |
|
---|
4816 | From libpng-1.4.0 until 1.4.4, the png_get_uint_16 macro (but not the
|
---|
4817 | function) incorrectly returned a value of type png_uint_32.
|
---|
4818 | The incorrect macro was removed from libpng-1.4.5.
|
---|
4819 |
|
---|
4820 | Checking for invalid palette index on write was added at libpng
|
---|
4821 | 1.5.10. If a pixel contains an invalid (out-of-range) index libpng issues
|
---|
4822 | a benign error. This is enabled by default because this condition is an
|
---|
4823 | error according to the PNG specification, Clause 11.3.2, but the error can
|
---|
4824 | be ignored in each png_ptr with
|
---|
4825 |
|
---|
4826 | png_set_check_for_invalid_index(png_ptr, allowed);
|
---|
4827 |
|
---|
4828 | allowed - one of
|
---|
4829 | 0: disable benign error (accept the
|
---|
4830 | invalid data without warning).
|
---|
4831 | 1: enable benign error (treat the
|
---|
4832 | invalid data as an error or a
|
---|
4833 | warning).
|
---|
4834 |
|
---|
4835 | If the error is ignored, or if png_benign_error() treats it as a warning,
|
---|
4836 | any invalid pixels are decoded as opaque black by the decoder and written
|
---|
4837 | as-is by the encoder.
|
---|
4838 |
|
---|
4839 | Retrieving the maximum palette index found was added at libpng-1.5.15.
|
---|
4840 | This statement must appear after png_read_png() or png_read_image() while
|
---|
4841 | reading, and after png_write_png() or png_write_image() while writing.
|
---|
4842 |
|
---|
4843 | int max_palette = png_get_palette_max(png_ptr, info_ptr);
|
---|
4844 |
|
---|
4845 | This will return the maximum palette index found in the image, or "-1" if
|
---|
4846 | the palette was not checked, or "0" if no palette was found. Note that this
|
---|
4847 | does not account for any palette index used by ancillary chunks such as the
|
---|
4848 | bKGD chunk; you must check those separately to determine the maximum
|
---|
4849 | palette index actually used.
|
---|
4850 |
|
---|
4851 | There are no substantial API changes between the non-deprecated parts of
|
---|
4852 | the 1.4.5 API and the 1.5.0 API; however, the ability to directly access
|
---|
4853 | members of the main libpng control structures, png_struct and png_info,
|
---|
4854 | deprecated in earlier versions of libpng, has been completely removed from
|
---|
4855 | libpng 1.5, and new private "pngstruct.h", "pnginfo.h", and "pngdebug.h"
|
---|
4856 | header files were created.
|
---|
4857 |
|
---|
4858 | We no longer include zlib.h in png.h. The include statement has been moved
|
---|
4859 | to pngstruct.h, where it is not accessible by applications. Applications that
|
---|
4860 | need access to information in zlib.h will need to add the '#include "zlib.h"'
|
---|
4861 | directive. It does not matter whether this is placed prior to or after
|
---|
4862 | the '"#include png.h"' directive.
|
---|
4863 |
|
---|
4864 | The png_sprintf(), png_strcpy(), and png_strncpy() macros are no longer used
|
---|
4865 | and were removed.
|
---|
4866 |
|
---|
4867 | We moved the png_strlen(), png_memcpy(), png_memset(), and png_memcmp()
|
---|
4868 | macros into a private header file (pngpriv.h) that is not accessible to
|
---|
4869 | applications.
|
---|
4870 |
|
---|
4871 | In png_get_iCCP, the type of "profile" was changed from png_charpp
|
---|
4872 | to png_bytepp, and in png_set_iCCP, from png_charp to png_const_bytep.
|
---|
4873 |
|
---|
4874 | There are changes of form in png.h, including new and changed macros to
|
---|
4875 | declare parts of the API. Some API functions with arguments that are
|
---|
4876 | pointers to data not modified within the function have been corrected to
|
---|
4877 | declare these arguments with const.
|
---|
4878 |
|
---|
4879 | Much of the internal use of C macros to control the library build has also
|
---|
4880 | changed and some of this is visible in the exported header files, in
|
---|
4881 | particular the use of macros to control data and API elements visible
|
---|
4882 | during application compilation may require significant revision to
|
---|
4883 | application code. (It is extremely rare for an application to do this.)
|
---|
4884 |
|
---|
4885 | Any program that compiled against libpng 1.4 and did not use deprecated
|
---|
4886 | features or access internal library structures should compile and work
|
---|
4887 | against libpng 1.5, except for the change in the prototype for
|
---|
4888 | png_get_iCCP() and png_set_iCCP() API functions mentioned above.
|
---|
4889 |
|
---|
4890 | libpng 1.5.0 adds PNG_ PASS macros to help in the reading and writing of
|
---|
4891 | interlaced images. The macros return the number of rows and columns in
|
---|
4892 | each pass and information that can be used to de-interlace and (if
|
---|
4893 | absolutely necessary) interlace an image.
|
---|
4894 |
|
---|
4895 | libpng 1.5.0 adds an API png_longjmp(png_ptr, value). This API calls
|
---|
4896 | the application-provided png_longjmp_ptr on the internal, but application
|
---|
4897 | initialized, longjmp buffer. It is provided as a convenience to avoid
|
---|
4898 | the need to use the png_jmpbuf macro, which had the unnecessary side
|
---|
4899 | effect of resetting the internal png_longjmp_ptr value.
|
---|
4900 |
|
---|
4901 | libpng 1.5.0 includes a complete fixed point API. By default this is
|
---|
4902 | present along with the corresponding floating point API. In general the
|
---|
4903 | fixed point API is faster and smaller than the floating point one because
|
---|
4904 | the PNG file format used fixed point, not floating point. This applies
|
---|
4905 | even if the library uses floating point in internal calculations. A new
|
---|
4906 | macro, PNG_FLOATING_ARITHMETIC_SUPPORTED, reveals whether the library
|
---|
4907 | uses floating point arithmetic (the default) or fixed point arithmetic
|
---|
4908 | internally for performance critical calculations such as gamma correction.
|
---|
4909 | In some cases, the gamma calculations may produce slightly different
|
---|
4910 | results. This has changed the results in png_rgb_to_gray and in alpha
|
---|
4911 | composition (png_set_background for example). This applies even if the
|
---|
4912 | original image was already linear (gamma == 1.0) and, therefore, it is
|
---|
4913 | not necessary to linearize the image. This is because libpng has *not*
|
---|
4914 | been changed to optimize that case correctly, yet.
|
---|
4915 |
|
---|
4916 | Fixed point support for the sCAL chunk comes with an important caveat;
|
---|
4917 | the sCAL specification uses a decimal encoding of floating point values
|
---|
4918 | and the accuracy of PNG fixed point values is insufficient for
|
---|
4919 | representation of these values. Consequently a "string" API
|
---|
4920 | (png_get_sCAL_s and png_set_sCAL_s) is the only reliable way of reading
|
---|
4921 | arbitrary sCAL chunks in the absence of either the floating point API or
|
---|
4922 | internal floating point calculations. Starting with libpng-1.5.0, both
|
---|
4923 | of these functions are present when PNG_sCAL_SUPPORTED is defined. Prior
|
---|
4924 | to libpng-1.5.0, their presence also depended upon PNG_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4925 | being defined and PNG_FLOATING_POINT_SUPPORTED not being defined.
|
---|
4926 |
|
---|
4927 | Applications no longer need to include the optional distribution header
|
---|
4928 | file pngusr.h or define the corresponding macros during application
|
---|
4929 | build in order to see the correct variant of the libpng API. From 1.5.0
|
---|
4930 | application code can check for the corresponding _SUPPORTED macro:
|
---|
4931 |
|
---|
4932 | #ifdef PNG_INCH_CONVERSIONS_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4933 | /* code that uses the inch conversion APIs. */
|
---|
4934 | #endif
|
---|
4935 |
|
---|
4936 | This macro will only be defined if the inch conversion functions have been
|
---|
4937 | compiled into libpng. The full set of macros, and whether or not support
|
---|
4938 | has been compiled in, are available in the header file pnglibconf.h.
|
---|
4939 | This header file is specific to the libpng build. Notice that prior to
|
---|
4940 | 1.5.0 the _SUPPORTED macros would always have the default definition unless
|
---|
4941 | reset by pngusr.h or by explicit settings on the compiler command line.
|
---|
4942 | These settings may produce compiler warnings or errors in 1.5.0 because
|
---|
4943 | of macro redefinition.
|
---|
4944 |
|
---|
4945 | Applications can now choose whether to use these macros or to call the
|
---|
4946 | corresponding function by defining PNG_USE_READ_MACROS or
|
---|
4947 | PNG_NO_USE_READ_MACROS before including png.h. Notice that this is
|
---|
4948 | only supported from 1.5.0; defining PNG_NO_USE_READ_MACROS prior to 1.5.0
|
---|
4949 | will lead to a link failure.
|
---|
4950 |
|
---|
4951 | Prior to libpng-1.5.4, the zlib compressor used the same set of parameters
|
---|
4952 | when compressing the IDAT data and textual data such as zTXt and iCCP.
|
---|
4953 | In libpng-1.5.4 we reinitialized the zlib stream for each type of data.
|
---|
4954 | We added five png_set_text_*() functions for setting the parameters to
|
---|
4955 | use with textual data.
|
---|
4956 |
|
---|
4957 | Prior to libpng-1.5.4, the PNG_READ_16_TO_8_ACCURATE_SCALE_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4958 | option was off by default, and slightly inaccurate scaling occurred.
|
---|
4959 | This option can no longer be turned off, and the choice of accurate
|
---|
4960 | or inaccurate 16-to-8 scaling is by using the new png_set_scale_16_to_8()
|
---|
4961 | API for accurate scaling or the old png_set_strip_16_to_8() API for simple
|
---|
4962 | chopping. In libpng-1.5.4, the PNG_READ_16_TO_8_ACCURATE_SCALE_SUPPORTED
|
---|
4963 | macro became PNG_READ_SCALE_16_TO_8_SUPPORTED, and the PNG_READ_16_TO_8
|
---|
4964 | macro became PNG_READ_STRIP_16_TO_8_SUPPORTED, to enable the two
|
---|
4965 | png_set_*_16_to_8() functions separately.
|
---|
4966 |
|
---|
4967 | Prior to libpng-1.5.4, the png_set_user_limits() function could only be
|
---|
4968 | used to reduce the width and height limits from the value of
|
---|
4969 | PNG_USER_WIDTH_MAX and PNG_USER_HEIGHT_MAX, although this document said
|
---|
4970 | that it could be used to override them. Now this function will reduce or
|
---|
4971 | increase the limits.
|
---|
4972 |
|
---|
4973 | Starting in libpng-1.5.22, default user limits were established. These
|
---|
4974 | can be overridden by application calls to png_set_user_limits(),
|
---|
4975 | png_set_user_chunk_cache_max(), and/or png_set_user_malloc_max().
|
---|
4976 | The limits are now
|
---|
4977 | max possible default
|
---|
4978 | png_user_width_max 0x7fffffff 1,000,000
|
---|
4979 | png_user_height_max 0x7fffffff 1,000,000
|
---|
4980 | png_user_chunk_cache_max 0 (unlimited) 1000
|
---|
4981 | png_user_chunk_malloc_max 0 (unlimited) 8,000,000
|
---|
4982 |
|
---|
4983 | The png_set_option() function (and the "options" member of the png struct) was
|
---|
4984 | added to libpng-1.5.15, with option PNG_ARM_NEON.
|
---|
4985 |
|
---|
4986 | The library now supports a complete fixed point implementation and can
|
---|
4987 | thus be used on systems that have no floating point support or very
|
---|
4988 | limited or slow support. Previously gamma correction, an essential part
|
---|
4989 | of complete PNG support, required reasonably fast floating point.
|
---|
4990 |
|
---|
4991 | As part of this the choice of internal implementation has been made
|
---|
4992 | independent of the choice of fixed versus floating point APIs and all the
|
---|
4993 | missing fixed point APIs have been implemented.
|
---|
4994 |
|
---|
4995 | The exact mechanism used to control attributes of API functions has
|
---|
4996 | changed, as described in the INSTALL file.
|
---|
4997 |
|
---|
4998 | A new test program, pngvalid, is provided in addition to pngtest.
|
---|
4999 | pngvalid validates the arithmetic accuracy of the gamma correction
|
---|
5000 | calculations and includes a number of validations of the file format.
|
---|
5001 | A subset of the full range of tests is run when "make check" is done
|
---|
5002 | (in the 'configure' build.) pngvalid also allows total allocated memory
|
---|
5003 | usage to be evaluated and performs additional memory overwrite validation.
|
---|
5004 |
|
---|
5005 | Many changes to individual feature macros have been made. The following
|
---|
5006 | are the changes most likely to be noticed by library builders who
|
---|
5007 | configure libpng:
|
---|
5008 |
|
---|
5009 | 1) All feature macros now have consistent naming:
|
---|
5010 |
|
---|
5011 | #define PNG_NO_feature turns the feature off
|
---|
5012 | #define PNG_feature_SUPPORTED turns the feature on
|
---|
5013 |
|
---|
5014 | pnglibconf.h contains one line for each feature macro which is either:
|
---|
5015 |
|
---|
5016 | #define PNG_feature_SUPPORTED
|
---|
5017 |
|
---|
5018 | if the feature is supported or:
|
---|
5019 |
|
---|
5020 | /*#undef PNG_feature_SUPPORTED*/
|
---|
5021 |
|
---|
5022 | if it is not. Library code consistently checks for the 'SUPPORTED' macro.
|
---|
5023 | It does not, and libpng applications should not, check for the 'NO' macro
|
---|
5024 | which will not normally be defined even if the feature is not supported.
|
---|
5025 | The 'NO' macros are only used internally for setting or not setting the
|
---|
5026 | corresponding 'SUPPORTED' macros.
|
---|
5027 |
|
---|
5028 | Compatibility with the old names is provided as follows:
|
---|
5029 |
|
---|
5030 | PNG_INCH_CONVERSIONS turns on PNG_INCH_CONVERSIONS_SUPPORTED
|
---|
5031 |
|
---|
5032 | And the following definitions disable the corresponding feature:
|
---|
5033 |
|
---|
5034 | PNG_SETJMP_NOT_SUPPORTED disables SETJMP
|
---|
5035 | PNG_READ_TRANSFORMS_NOT_SUPPORTED disables READ_TRANSFORMS
|
---|
5036 | PNG_NO_READ_COMPOSITED_NODIV disables READ_COMPOSITE_NODIV
|
---|
5037 | PNG_WRITE_TRANSFORMS_NOT_SUPPORTED disables WRITE_TRANSFORMS
|
---|
5038 | PNG_READ_ANCILLARY_CHUNKS_NOT_SUPPORTED disables READ_ANCILLARY_CHUNKS
|
---|
5039 | PNG_WRITE_ANCILLARY_CHUNKS_NOT_SUPPORTED disables WRITE_ANCILLARY_CHUNKS
|
---|
5040 |
|
---|
5041 | Library builders should remove use of the above, inconsistent, names.
|
---|
5042 |
|
---|
5043 | 2) Warning and error message formatting was previously conditional on
|
---|
5044 | the STDIO feature. The library has been changed to use the
|
---|
5045 | CONSOLE_IO feature instead. This means that if CONSOLE_IO is disabled
|
---|
5046 | the library no longer uses the printf(3) functions, even though the
|
---|
5047 | default read/write implementations use (FILE) style stdio.h functions.
|
---|
5048 |
|
---|
5049 | 3) Three feature macros now control the fixed/floating point decisions:
|
---|
5050 |
|
---|
5051 | PNG_FLOATING_POINT_SUPPORTED enables the floating point APIs
|
---|
5052 |
|
---|
5053 | PNG_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED enables the fixed point APIs; however, in
|
---|
5054 | practice these are normally required internally anyway (because the PNG
|
---|
5055 | file format is fixed point), therefore in most cases PNG_NO_FIXED_POINT
|
---|
5056 | merely stops the function from being exported.
|
---|
5057 |
|
---|
5058 | PNG_FLOATING_ARITHMETIC_SUPPORTED chooses between the internal floating
|
---|
5059 | point implementation or the fixed point one. Typically the fixed point
|
---|
5060 | implementation is larger and slower than the floating point implementation
|
---|
5061 | on a system that supports floating point; however, it may be faster on a
|
---|
5062 | system which lacks floating point hardware and therefore uses a software
|
---|
5063 | emulation.
|
---|
5064 |
|
---|
5065 | 4) Added PNG_{READ,WRITE}_INT_FUNCTIONS_SUPPORTED. This allows the
|
---|
5066 | functions to read and write ints to be disabled independently of
|
---|
5067 | PNG_USE_READ_MACROS, which allows libpng to be built with the functions
|
---|
5068 | even though the default is to use the macros - this allows applications
|
---|
5069 | to choose at app buildtime whether or not to use macros (previously
|
---|
5070 | impossible because the functions weren't in the default build.)
|
---|
5071 |
|
---|
5072 | XII. Changes to Libpng from version 1.5.x to 1.6.x
|
---|
5073 |
|
---|
5074 | A "simplified API" has been added (see documentation in png.h and a simple
|
---|
5075 | example in contrib/examples/pngtopng.c). The new publicly visible API
|
---|
5076 | includes the following:
|
---|
5077 |
|
---|
5078 | macros:
|
---|
5079 | PNG_FORMAT_*
|
---|
5080 | PNG_IMAGE_*
|
---|
5081 | structures:
|
---|
5082 | png_control
|
---|
5083 | png_image
|
---|
5084 | read functions
|
---|
5085 | png_image_begin_read_from_file()
|
---|
5086 | png_image_begin_read_from_stdio()
|
---|
5087 | png_image_begin_read_from_memory()
|
---|
5088 | png_image_finish_read()
|
---|
5089 | png_image_free()
|
---|
5090 | write functions
|
---|
5091 | png_image_write_to_file()
|
---|
5092 | png_image_write_to_memory()
|
---|
5093 | png_image_write_to_stdio()
|
---|
5094 |
|
---|
5095 | Starting with libpng-1.6.0, you can configure libpng to prefix all exported
|
---|
5096 | symbols, using the PNG_PREFIX macro.
|
---|
5097 |
|
---|
5098 | We no longer include string.h in png.h. The include statement has been moved
|
---|
5099 | to pngpriv.h, where it is not accessible by applications. Applications that
|
---|
5100 | need access to information in string.h must add an '#include <string.h>'
|
---|
5101 | directive. It does not matter whether this is placed prior to or after
|
---|
5102 | the '#include "png.h"' directive.
|
---|
5103 |
|
---|
5104 | The following API are now DEPRECATED:
|
---|
5105 | png_info_init_3()
|
---|
5106 | png_convert_to_rfc1123() which has been replaced
|
---|
5107 | with png_convert_to_rfc1123_buffer()
|
---|
5108 | png_malloc_default()
|
---|
5109 | png_free_default()
|
---|
5110 | png_reset_zstream()
|
---|
5111 |
|
---|
5112 | The following have been removed:
|
---|
5113 | png_get_io_chunk_name(), which has been replaced
|
---|
5114 | with png_get_io_chunk_type(). The new
|
---|
5115 | function returns a 32-bit integer instead of
|
---|
5116 | a string.
|
---|
5117 | The png_sizeof(), png_strlen(), png_memcpy(), png_memcmp(), and
|
---|
5118 | png_memset() macros are no longer used in the libpng sources and
|
---|
5119 | have been removed. These had already been made invisible to applications
|
---|
5120 | (i.e., defined in the private pngpriv.h header file) since libpng-1.5.0.
|
---|
5121 |
|
---|
5122 | The signatures of many exported functions were changed, such that
|
---|
5123 | png_structp became png_structrp or png_const_structrp
|
---|
5124 | png_infop became png_inforp or png_const_inforp
|
---|
5125 | where "rp" indicates a "restricted pointer".
|
---|
5126 |
|
---|
5127 | Dropped support for 16-bit platforms. The support for FAR/far types has
|
---|
5128 | been eliminated and the definition of png_alloc_size_t is now controlled
|
---|
5129 | by a flag so that 'small size_t' systems can select it if necessary.
|
---|
5130 |
|
---|
5131 | Error detection in some chunks has improved; in particular the iCCP chunk
|
---|
5132 | reader now does pretty complete validation of the basic format. Some bad
|
---|
5133 | profiles that were previously accepted are now accepted with a warning or
|
---|
5134 | rejected, depending upon the png_set_benign_errors() setting, in particular
|
---|
5135 | the very old broken Microsoft/HP 3144-byte sRGB profile. Starting with
|
---|
5136 | libpng-1.6.11, recognizing and checking sRGB profiles can be avoided by
|
---|
5137 | means of
|
---|
5138 |
|
---|
5139 | #if defined(PNG_SKIP_sRGB_CHECK_PROFILE) && \
|
---|
5140 | defined(PNG_SET_OPTION_SUPPORTED)
|
---|
5141 | png_set_option(png_ptr, PNG_SKIP_sRGB_CHECK_PROFILE,
|
---|
5142 | PNG_OPTION_ON);
|
---|
5143 | #endif
|
---|
5144 |
|
---|
5145 | It's not a good idea to do this if you are using the "simplified API",
|
---|
5146 | which needs to be able to recognize sRGB profiles conveyed via the iCCP
|
---|
5147 | chunk.
|
---|
5148 |
|
---|
5149 | The PNG spec requirement that only grayscale profiles may appear in images
|
---|
5150 | with color type 0 or 4 and that even if the image only contains gray pixels,
|
---|
5151 | only RGB profiles may appear in images with color type 2, 3, or 6, is now
|
---|
5152 | enforced. The sRGB chunk is allowed to appear in images with any color type
|
---|
5153 | and is interpreted by libpng to convey a one-tracer-curve gray profile or a
|
---|
5154 | three-tracer-curve RGB profile as appropriate.
|
---|
5155 |
|
---|
5156 | Libpng 1.5.x erroneously used /MD for Debug DLL builds; if you used the debug
|
---|
5157 | builds in your app and you changed your app to use /MD you will need to
|
---|
5158 | change it back to /MDd for libpng 1.6.x.
|
---|
5159 |
|
---|
5160 | Prior to libpng-1.6.0 a warning would be issued if the iTXt chunk contained
|
---|
5161 | an empty language field or an empty translated keyword. Both of these
|
---|
5162 | are allowed by the PNG specification, so these warnings are no longer issued.
|
---|
5163 |
|
---|
5164 | The library now issues an error if the application attempts to set a
|
---|
5165 | transform after it calls png_read_update_info() or if it attempts to call
|
---|
5166 | both png_read_update_info() and png_start_read_image() or to call either
|
---|
5167 | of them more than once.
|
---|
5168 |
|
---|
5169 | The default condition for benign_errors is now to treat benign errors as
|
---|
5170 | warnings while reading and as errors while writing.
|
---|
5171 |
|
---|
5172 | The library now issues a warning if both background processing and RGB to
|
---|
5173 | gray are used when gamma correction happens. As with previous versions of
|
---|
5174 | the library the results are numerically very incorrect in this case.
|
---|
5175 |
|
---|
5176 | There are some minor arithmetic changes in some transforms such as
|
---|
5177 | png_set_background(), that might be detected by certain regression tests.
|
---|
5178 |
|
---|
5179 | Unknown chunk handling has been improved internally, without any API change.
|
---|
5180 | This adds more correct option control of the unknown handling, corrects
|
---|
5181 | a pre-existing bug where the per-chunk 'keep' setting is ignored, and makes
|
---|
5182 | it possible to skip IDAT chunks in the sequential reader.
|
---|
5183 |
|
---|
5184 | The machine-generated configure files are no longer included in branches
|
---|
5185 | libpng16 and later of the GIT repository. They continue to be included
|
---|
5186 | in the tarball releases, however.
|
---|
5187 |
|
---|
5188 | Libpng-1.6.0 through 1.6.2 used the CMF bytes at the beginning of the IDAT
|
---|
5189 | stream to set the size of the sliding window for reading instead of using the
|
---|
5190 | default 32-kbyte sliding window size. It was discovered that there are
|
---|
5191 | hundreds of PNG files in the wild that have incorrect CMF bytes that caused
|
---|
5192 | zlib to issue the "invalid distance too far back" error and reject the file.
|
---|
5193 | Libpng-1.6.3 and later calculate their own safe CMF from the image dimensions,
|
---|
5194 | provide a way to revert to the libpng-1.5.x behavior (ignoring the CMF bytes
|
---|
5195 | and using a 32-kbyte sliding window), by using
|
---|
5196 |
|
---|
5197 | png_set_option(png_ptr, PNG_MAXIMUM_INFLATE_WINDOW,
|
---|
5198 | PNG_OPTION_ON);
|
---|
5199 |
|
---|
5200 | and provide a tool (contrib/tools/pngfix) for rewriting a PNG file while
|
---|
5201 | optimizing the CMF bytes in its IDAT chunk correctly.
|
---|
5202 |
|
---|
5203 | Libpng-1.6.0 and libpng-1.6.1 wrote uncompressed iTXt chunks with the wrong
|
---|
5204 | length, which resulted in PNG files that cannot be read beyond the bad iTXt
|
---|
5205 | chunk. This error was fixed in libpng-1.6.3, and a tool (called
|
---|
5206 | contrib/tools/png-fix-itxt) has been added to the libpng distribution.
|
---|
5207 |
|
---|
5208 | Starting with libpng-1.6.17, the PNG_SAFE_LIMITS macro was eliminated
|
---|
5209 | and safe limits are used by default (users who need larger limits
|
---|
5210 | can still override them at compile time or run time, as described above).
|
---|
5211 |
|
---|
5212 | The new limits are
|
---|
5213 | default spec limit
|
---|
5214 | png_user_width_max 1,000,000 2,147,483,647
|
---|
5215 | png_user_height_max 1,000,000 2,147,483,647
|
---|
5216 | png_user_chunk_cache_max 128 unlimited
|
---|
5217 | png_user_chunk_malloc_max 8,000,000 unlimited
|
---|
5218 |
|
---|
5219 | Starting with libpng-1.6.18, a PNG_RELEASE_BUILD macro was added, which allows
|
---|
5220 | library builders to control compilation for an installed system (a release build).
|
---|
5221 | It can be set for testing debug or beta builds to ensure that they will compile
|
---|
5222 | when the build type is switched to RC or STABLE. In essence this overrides the
|
---|
5223 | PNG_LIBPNG_BUILD_BASE_TYPE definition which is not directly user controllable.
|
---|
5224 |
|
---|
5225 | Starting with libpng-1.6.19, attempting to set an over-length PLTE chunk
|
---|
5226 | is an error. Previously this requirement of the PNG specification was not
|
---|
5227 | enforced, and the palette was always limited to 256 entries. An over-length
|
---|
5228 | PLTE chunk found in an input PNG is silently truncated.
|
---|
5229 |
|
---|
5230 | Starting with libpng-1.6.31, the eXIf chunk is supported. Libpng does not
|
---|
5231 | attempt to decode the Exif profile; it simply returns a byte array
|
---|
5232 | containing the profile to the calling application which must do its own
|
---|
5233 | decoding.
|
---|
5234 |
|
---|
5235 | XIII. Detecting libpng
|
---|
5236 |
|
---|
5237 | The png_get_io_ptr() function has been present since libpng-0.88, has never
|
---|
5238 | changed, and is unaffected by conditional compilation macros. It is the
|
---|
5239 | best choice for use in configure scripts for detecting the presence of any
|
---|
5240 | libpng version since 0.88. In an autoconf "configure.in" you could use
|
---|
5241 |
|
---|
5242 | AC_CHECK_LIB(png, png_get_io_ptr, ...
|
---|
5243 |
|
---|
5244 | XV. Source code repository
|
---|
5245 |
|
---|
5246 | Since about February 2009, version 1.2.34, libpng has been under "git" source
|
---|
5247 | control. The git repository was built from old libpng-x.y.z.tar.gz files
|
---|
5248 | going back to version 0.70. You can access the git repository (read only)
|
---|
5249 | at
|
---|
5250 |
|
---|
5251 | https://github.com/glennrp/libpng or
|
---|
5252 | https://git.code.sf.net/p/libpng/code.git
|
---|
5253 |
|
---|
5254 | or you can browse it with a web browser at
|
---|
5255 |
|
---|
5256 | https://github.com/glennrp/libpng or
|
---|
5257 | https://sourceforge.net/p/libpng/code/ci/libpng16/tree/
|
---|
5258 |
|
---|
5259 | Patches can be sent to png-mng-implement at lists.sourceforge.net or
|
---|
5260 | uploaded to the libpng bug tracker at
|
---|
5261 |
|
---|
5262 | https://libpng.sourceforge.io/
|
---|
5263 |
|
---|
5264 | or as a "pull request" to
|
---|
5265 |
|
---|
5266 | https://github.com/glennrp/libpng/pulls
|
---|
5267 |
|
---|
5268 | We also accept patches built from the tar or zip distributions, and
|
---|
5269 | simple verbal descriptions of bug fixes, reported either to the
|
---|
5270 | SourceForge bug tracker, to the png-mng-implement at lists.sf.net
|
---|
5271 | mailing list, as github issues.
|
---|
5272 |
|
---|
5273 | XV. Coding style
|
---|
5274 |
|
---|
5275 | Our coding style is similar to the "Allman" style
|
---|
5276 | (See https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indent_style#Allman_style), with curly
|
---|
5277 | braces on separate lines:
|
---|
5278 |
|
---|
5279 | if (condition)
|
---|
5280 | {
|
---|
5281 | action;
|
---|
5282 | }
|
---|
5283 |
|
---|
5284 | else if (another condition)
|
---|
5285 | {
|
---|
5286 | another action;
|
---|
5287 | }
|
---|
5288 |
|
---|
5289 | The braces can be omitted from simple one-line actions:
|
---|
5290 |
|
---|
5291 | if (condition)
|
---|
5292 | return 0;
|
---|
5293 |
|
---|
5294 | We use 3-space indentation, except for continued statements which
|
---|
5295 | are usually indented the same as the first line of the statement
|
---|
5296 | plus four more spaces.
|
---|
5297 |
|
---|
5298 | For macro definitions we use 2-space indentation, always leaving the "#"
|
---|
5299 | in the first column.
|
---|
5300 |
|
---|
5301 | #ifndef PNG_NO_FEATURE
|
---|
5302 | # ifndef PNG_FEATURE_SUPPORTED
|
---|
5303 | # define PNG_FEATURE_SUPPORTED
|
---|
5304 | # endif
|
---|
5305 | #endif
|
---|
5306 |
|
---|
5307 | Comments appear with the leading "/*" at the same indentation as
|
---|
5308 | the statement that follows the comment:
|
---|
5309 |
|
---|
5310 | /* Single-line comment */
|
---|
5311 | statement;
|
---|
5312 |
|
---|
5313 | /* This is a multiple-line
|
---|
5314 | * comment.
|
---|
5315 | */
|
---|
5316 | statement;
|
---|
5317 |
|
---|
5318 | Very short comments can be placed after the end of the statement
|
---|
5319 | to which they pertain:
|
---|
5320 |
|
---|
5321 | statement; /* comment */
|
---|
5322 |
|
---|
5323 | We don't use C++ style ("//") comments. We have, however,
|
---|
5324 | used them in the past in some now-abandoned MMX assembler
|
---|
5325 | code.
|
---|
5326 |
|
---|
5327 | Functions and their curly braces are not indented, and
|
---|
5328 | exported functions are marked with PNGAPI:
|
---|
5329 |
|
---|
5330 | /* This is a public function that is visible to
|
---|
5331 | * application programmers. It does thus-and-so.
|
---|
5332 | */
|
---|
5333 | void PNGAPI
|
---|
5334 | png_exported_function(png_ptr, png_info, foo)
|
---|
5335 | {
|
---|
5336 | body;
|
---|
5337 | }
|
---|
5338 |
|
---|
5339 | The return type and decorations are placed on a separate line
|
---|
5340 | ahead of the function name, as illustrated above.
|
---|
5341 |
|
---|
5342 | The prototypes for all exported functions appear in png.h,
|
---|
5343 | above the comment that says
|
---|
5344 |
|
---|
5345 | /* Maintainer: Put new public prototypes here ... */
|
---|
5346 |
|
---|
5347 | We mark all non-exported functions with "/* PRIVATE */"":
|
---|
5348 |
|
---|
5349 | void /* PRIVATE */
|
---|
5350 | png_non_exported_function(png_ptr, png_info, foo)
|
---|
5351 | {
|
---|
5352 | body;
|
---|
5353 | }
|
---|
5354 |
|
---|
5355 | The prototypes for non-exported functions (except for those in
|
---|
5356 | pngtest) appear in pngpriv.h above the comment that says
|
---|
5357 |
|
---|
5358 | /* Maintainer: Put new private prototypes here ^ */
|
---|
5359 |
|
---|
5360 | To avoid polluting the global namespace, the names of all exported
|
---|
5361 | functions and variables begin with "png_", and all publicly visible C
|
---|
5362 | preprocessor macros begin with "PNG". We request that applications that
|
---|
5363 | use libpng *not* begin any of their own symbols with either of these strings.
|
---|
5364 |
|
---|
5365 | We put a space after the "sizeof" operator and we omit the
|
---|
5366 | optional parentheses around its argument when the argument
|
---|
5367 | is an expression, not a type name, and we always enclose the
|
---|
5368 | sizeof operator, with its argument, in parentheses:
|
---|
5369 |
|
---|
5370 | (sizeof (png_uint_32))
|
---|
5371 | (sizeof array)
|
---|
5372 |
|
---|
5373 | Prior to libpng-1.6.0 we used a "png_sizeof()" macro, formatted as
|
---|
5374 | though it were a function.
|
---|
5375 |
|
---|
5376 | Control keywords if, for, while, and switch are always followed by a space
|
---|
5377 | to distinguish them from function calls, which have no trailing space.
|
---|
5378 |
|
---|
5379 | We put a space after each comma and after each semicolon
|
---|
5380 | in "for" statements, and we put spaces before and after each
|
---|
5381 | C binary operator and after "for" or "while", and before
|
---|
5382 | "?". We don't put a space between a typecast and the expression
|
---|
5383 | being cast, nor do we put one between a function name and the
|
---|
5384 | left parenthesis that follows it:
|
---|
5385 |
|
---|
5386 | for (i = 2; i > 0; --i)
|
---|
5387 | y[i] = a(x) + (int)b;
|
---|
5388 |
|
---|
5389 | We prefer #ifdef and #ifndef to #if defined() and #if !defined()
|
---|
5390 | when there is only one macro being tested. We always use parentheses
|
---|
5391 | with "defined".
|
---|
5392 |
|
---|
5393 | We express integer constants that are used as bit masks in hex format,
|
---|
5394 | with an even number of lower-case hex digits, and to make them unsigned
|
---|
5395 | (e.g., 0x00U, 0xffU, 0x0100U) and long if they are greater than 0x7fff
|
---|
5396 | (e.g., 0xffffUL).
|
---|
5397 |
|
---|
5398 | We prefer to use underscores rather than camelCase in names, except
|
---|
5399 | for a few type names that we inherit from zlib.h.
|
---|
5400 |
|
---|
5401 | We prefer "if (something != 0)" and "if (something == 0)" over
|
---|
5402 | "if (something)" and if "(!something)", respectively, and for pointers
|
---|
5403 | we prefer "if (some_pointer != NULL)" or "if (some_pointer == NULL)".
|
---|
5404 |
|
---|
5405 | We do not use the TAB character for indentation in the C sources.
|
---|
5406 |
|
---|
5407 | Lines do not exceed 80 characters.
|
---|
5408 |
|
---|
5409 | Other rules can be inferred by inspecting the libpng source.
|
---|